Vision Engineering Manual (4800DR 401)
Vision Engineering Manual (4800DR 401)
Vision Engineering Manual (4800DR 401)
V I S I O N
Vision
Engineering Manual
Copyright
©2015 Ross Video Limited, Ross®, OverDrive®, and any related marks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Ross Video Limited. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective companies. PATENTS ISSUED and PENDING. All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission
of Ross Video. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, Ross
Video assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for
damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Mac OS X is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Fedora and the Infinity design logo are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
Python and PyCon are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Python Software Foundation.
Patents
Patent numbers 4,205,346; 5,115,314; 5,280,346; 5,561,404; 7,034,886; 7,508,455; 7,602,446;
7,834,886; 7,914,332; 8,499,019 B2; 2039277; 1237518; 1127289 and other patents pending.
Symbol Meanings
Protective Earth — This symbol identifies a Protective Earth (PE) terminal, which is
provided for connection of the supply system’s protective earth (green or green/yellow)
conductor.
This symbol on the equipment refers you to important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions within the Product Manual Documentation. Failure to heed this information may
present a major risk of damage or injury to persons or equipment.
Warning — The symbol with the word “Warning” within the equipment manual indicates a
potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution — The symbol with the word “Caution” within the equipment manual indicates a
potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It
may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Warning Hazardous Voltages — This symbol is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of shock to persons.
ESD Susceptibility — This symbol is used to alert the user that an electrical or electronic
device or assembly is susceptible to damage from an ESD event.
Warning 18. Indoor Use: WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this
apparatus to rain or moisture.
19. The safe operation of this product requires that a protective earth connection be
provided. A grounding conductor in the equipment's supply cord provides this protective
earth. To reduce the risk of electrical shock to the operator and service personnel, this
ground conductor must be connected to an earthed ground.
20. WARNING: This apparatus, when equipped with multiple power supplies, can generate
high leakage currents. To reduce the risk of electric shock, ensure that each individual
supply cord is connected to its own separate branch circuit with an earth connection.
21. CAUTION: These service instructions are for use by qualified service personnel only.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that
contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so (Engineering
Manual only).
Caution 22. These apparatus contain Lithium batteries, which if replaced incorrectly, or with an
incorrect type, may cause an explosion. Replace only with the same type. Dispose of
used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
23. Service barriers within this product are intended to protect the operator and service
personnel from hazardous voltages. For continued safety, replace all barriers after
servicing.
24. Certain parts of this equipment still present a safety hazard with the power switch in the
OFF position. To avoid electrical shock, disconnect all A/C power cords from the
chassis' rear appliance connectors before servicing.
25. This product contains safety critical parts, which, if incorrectly replaced, may present a
risk of fire or electrical shock. Components contained within the product’s power
supplies and power supply area are not intended to be customer-serviced and should be
returned to the factory for repair.
26. To reduce the risk of fire, replacement fuses must be the same type and rating.
27. Use only power cords specified for this product and certified for the country of use.
28. The safe operation of this equipment requires that the user heed and adhere to all
installation and servicing instruction contained within the equipment’s Engineering
Manuals.
29. For applicable V-100/V-100A Touchscreen Panel power supplies, see user instructions
contained within the Product’s Engineering Manual.
30. WARNING: Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
31. WARNING: This product includes an “Ethernet Port” which allows this product to be
connected to a local area network (LAN). Only connect to networks that remain inside
the building. Do not connect to networks that go outside the building.
EMC Notices
Notice — Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Ross Video
Limited could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
CANADA
This Class “A” digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appariel numerique de la classe “A” est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
EUROPE
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
CE Directive 93/68/EEC.
INTERNATIONAL
This equipment has been tested to CISPR 22:1997 along with amendments A1:2000 and
A2:2002, and found to comply with the limits for a Class A Digital device.
Notice — This is a Class A product. In domestic environments, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may have to take adequate measures.
Caution — Avoid handling the switcher circuit boards in high static environments such as
carpeted areas, and when synthetic fiber clothing is worn. Touch the frame to dissipate static
charge before removing boards from the frame, and exercise proper grounding precautions
when working on circuit boards.
Warranty and Repair Policy
Ross Video Limited (Ross) warrants its switchers and related options, to be free from defects
under normal use and service for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of shipment. Fader handle
assemblies are warranted for the life of the product. If an item becomes defective within the
warranty period Ross will repair or replace the defective item, as determined solely by Ross.
Warranty repairs will be conducted at Ross, with all shipping FOB Ross dock. If repairs are
conducted at the customer site, reasonable out-of-pocket charges will apply. At the discretion of
Ross, and on a temporary loan basis, plug in circuit boards or other replacement parts may be
supplied free of charge while defective items undergo repair. Return packing, shipping, and
special handling costs are the responsibility of the customer.
Software upgrades for switchers may occur from time to time, and are determined by Ross Video.
The upgrades are posted on the Ross Video website, and are free of charge for the life of the
switcher.
This warranty is void if products are subjected to misuse, neglect, accident, improper installation
or application, or unauthorized modification.
In no event shall Ross Video Limited be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages (including loss of profit). Implied warranties, including that of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are expressly limited to the duration of this
warranty.
This warranty is TRANSFERABLE to subsequent owners, subject to Ross’ notification of
change of ownership.
Environmental Information
The equipment that you purchased required the extraction and use of natural
resources for its production. It may contain hazardous substances that could
impact health and the environment.
To avoid the potential release of those substances into the environment and to diminish the need
for the extraction of natural resources, Ross Video encourages you to use the appropriate
take-back systems. These systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials from your
end-of-life equipment in an environmentally friendly and health conscious manner.
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol invites you to use these systems.
If you need more information on the collection, reuse, and recycling systems, please contact your
local or regional waste administration.
You can also contact Ross Video for more information on the environmental performances of our
products.
Company Address
Ross Video Limited Ross Video Incorporated
8 John Street P.O. Box 880
Iroquois, Ontario, K0E 1K0 Ogdensburg, New York
Canada USA 13669-0880
Contents 1
Introduction 1
About This Manual .......................................................................................................Eng 1-2
Documentation Conventions.........................................................................................Eng 1-3
Documentation Terms...................................................................................................Eng 1-4
Abbreviations................................................................................................................Eng 1-5
Related Publications .....................................................................................................Eng 1-6
A Word About Technical Support ................................................................................Eng 1-7
Switcher Basics 2
Equipment Overview ....................................................................................................Eng 2-2
Vision Control Panel ......................................................................................Eng 2-2
Vision Touchscreen Display...........................................................................Eng 2-7
Frame..............................................................................................................Eng 2-7
Control Panel Modules ............................................................................................... Eng 2-10
Control Panel CPU Module.......................................................................... Eng 2-10
Panel Module Controller Board.................................................................... Eng 2-10
Keyers Module ............................................................................................. Eng 2-10
Global Memory Module ............................................................................... Eng 2-10
Effects Memory Module............................................................................... Eng 2-10
Transition Module ........................................................................................ Eng 2-11
Positioner Module ........................................................................................ Eng 2-11
Preview Bus Module .................................................................................... Eng 2-11
Power Distribution Board............................................................................. Eng 2-11
Frame Boards .............................................................................................................. Eng 2-12
Frame CPU Board ........................................................................................ Eng 2-12
Video Input Board, 16 Input......................................................................... Eng 2-12
Video Input Board, with Crosspoint............................................................. Eng 2-12
Video Input Board, 10 Input......................................................................... Eng 2-12
Video Output Board ..................................................................................... Eng 2-12
Video Processor Board ................................................................................. Eng 2-13
Midplane....................................................................................................... Eng 2-13
Crosspoint Board .......................................................................................... Eng 2-13
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board ................................................................... Eng 2-13
Power Supplies ............................................................................................. Eng 2-13
Communication Ports .................................................................................................Eng 2-15
Control Panel Communication Ports ............................................................ Eng 2-15
Frame Communication Ports........................................................................ Eng 2-16
Tally Ports................................................................................................................... Eng 2-18
Custom Controls 10
Custom Controls ......................................................................................................... Eng 10-2
Tips for Working with Custom Controls...................................................... Eng 10-2
Stopping Custom Controls ........................................................................... Eng 10-4
Custom Control Interfaces .......................................................................................... Eng 10-5
Custom Control Bus ..................................................................................... Eng 10-5
Custom Control Soft Shot Box..................................................................... Eng 10-5
Custom Control Shot Box Module ............................................................... Eng 10-6
Global Memory Module ............................................................................... Eng 10-6
Custom Control Banks................................................................................................ Eng 10-7
Custom Control Bank Setup......................................................................... Eng 10-7
Naming Custom Control Banks and Shortcuts............................................. Eng 10-8
Programming Control Panel Functions.....................................................................Eng 10-10
Relative Custom Controls .......................................................................... Eng 10-11
Running Multiple Custom Controls ........................................................... Eng 10-13
Programming Special Functions ...............................................................................Eng 10-15
Attaching Custom Controls to Panel Buttons ...........................................................Eng 10-25
Attaching a Custom Control to a Panel Button .......................................... Eng 10-25
Deleting Custom Control Attachment to Panel Buttons ............................ Eng 10-26
Naming Custom Controls .........................................................................................Eng 10-28
Editing Custom Controls ..........................................................................................Eng 10-29
To Edit a Custom Control .......................................................................... Eng 10-29
Managing Custom Controls ......................................................................................Eng 10-32
Deleting Custom Controls ........................................................................................Eng 10-33
Custom Control Shortcuts.........................................................................................Eng 10-34
Device Transport Commands ...................................................................................Eng 10-36
Setting up Device Transport Commands.................................................... Eng 10-36
Custom Control Variable Pause................................................................................Eng 10-37
Setting a Custom Control Variable ............................................................ Eng 10-37
Inserting a Variable Pause .......................................................................... Eng 10-37
Switcher Personality 11
Personality List ........................................................................................................... Eng 11-2
Control Panel Button Color Schemes .......................................................................Eng 11-17
General Color Usage Setup ........................................................................ Eng 11-17
Assigning a Crosspoint Color..................................................................... Eng 11-19
Selecting a Color ........................................................................................ Eng 11-19
Mnemonic Color Schemes........................................................................................Eng 11-21
Control Panel Display Brightness.............................................................................Eng 11-23
Loading Color Schemes............................................................................................Eng 11-24
Lock/Unlock Personality ..........................................................................................Eng 11-25
Auxiliary Panels 14
Auxiliary Panel Overview...........................................................................................Eng 14-2
Auxiliary Control Panel ................................................................................Eng 14-2
Remote Aux Panels.......................................................................................Eng 14-3
Installing Auxiliary Panels..........................................................................................Eng 14-5
External Modules 15
Custom Control Shot Box Module ............................................................................. Eng 15-2
Custom Control Shot Box Module Setup..................................................... Eng 15-2
Creating Shot Box Pages .............................................................................. Eng 15-3
Naming Shot Box Pages............................................................................... Eng 15-4
Copying or Moving Shot Box Pages ............................................................ Eng 15-4
Audio Control Module................................................................................................ Eng 15-6
Audio Fader Maps ........................................................................................ Eng 15-6
Switcher Maintenance 18
Control Panel Power Supply Failure...........................................................................Eng 18-2
Troubleshooting a Failed Power Supply.......................................................Eng 18-2
Troubleshooting a Failed Cooling Fan .........................................................Eng 18-3
Replacing a Power Supply Module ..............................................................Eng 18-4
Frame Power Supply Failure.......................................................................................Eng 18-6
Frame Fan Failure .......................................................................................................Eng 18-8
Control Panel Power Supply .....................................................................................Eng 18-10
Control Panel Power Supply Functional Components ...............................Eng 18-10
Frame Power Supply .................................................................................................Eng 18-12
Frame Power Supply Functional Components ...........................................Eng 18-12
Replacing a Frame Power Supply...............................................................Eng 18-13
Cleaning the Frame Air Filter ...................................................................................Eng 18-15
Replacing the Hard Drive..........................................................................................Eng 18-16
Replacing the Hard Drive on the 4800AR-001 Frame CPU Board............Eng 18-16
Replacing the Hard Drive on the 4800AR-002 Frame CPU Board............Eng 18-18
Replacing a Control Panel Module ...........................................................................Eng 18-21
Removing a Control Panel Module ............................................................Eng 18-21
Installing a Control Panel Module ..............................................................Eng 18-22
Upgrading PMCs ........................................................................................Eng 18-23
Dusting Mode...........................................................................................................Eng 18-25
Appendix B. Specifications 20
Standard Components .................................................................................................Eng 20-2
General Switcher Specifications ................................................................................. Eng 20-3
Control Panel Power Supplies ...................................................................... Eng 20-3
Frame Power Supplies.................................................................................. Eng 20-4
Operating Environment Requirements ......................................................... Eng 20-5
Physical Specifications ............................................................................................... Eng 20-6
Control Panel Dimensions............................................................................ Eng 20-6
Frame Dimensions........................................................................................ Eng 20-6
Communication Specifications ...................................................................................Eng 20-8
Default Network Settings ............................................................................. Eng 20-8
Module Control Link Backbone................................................................... Eng 20-9
Frame Connector Types ............................................................................. Eng 20-12
Control Panel Connector Types.................................................................. Eng 20-13
Video Characteristics ................................................................................................Eng 20-14
Video Processing ........................................................................................ Eng 20-14
Video Formats ............................................................................................ Eng 20-14
Timing ........................................................................................................ Eng 20-15
LTC Timecode Input .................................................................................. Eng 20-15
Video Input Signal Characteristics............................................................. Eng 20-15
Video Output Signal Characteristics .......................................................... Eng 20-16
Frame Pinouts ...........................................................................................................Eng 20-17
Peripheral Ports .......................................................................................... Eng 20-17
Panel Port ................................................................................................... Eng 20-17
GPI I/O Ports .............................................................................................. Eng 20-18
LAN Ports................................................................................................... Eng 20-19
AC Power Ports .......................................................................................... Eng 20-19
Control Panel Pinouts ...............................................................................................Eng 20-21
Remote Ports .............................................................................................. Eng 20-21
External Link Ports..................................................................................... Eng 20-21
Tally Ports .................................................................................................. Eng 20-22
AC Power Ports .......................................................................................... Eng 20-23
Control Panel CPU Module Ports.............................................................................Eng 20-24
Control Panel CPU Module Functional Components ................................ Eng 20-24
Control Panel CPU Module Rear Panel ..................................................... Eng 20-25
Remote Aux Panel Pinouts .......................................................................................Eng 20-27
GPI Port ...................................................................................................... Eng 20-27
Main Port .................................................................................................... Eng 20-27
Echo Port .................................................................................................... Eng 20-28
Aux Panel Programming Mode Summary................................................................Eng 20-29
Appendix C. Worksheets 21
Video Input Worksheet ............................................................................................... Eng 21-2
Bus Map Worksheet.................................................................................................... Eng 21-6
Video Output Worksheet ............................................................................................ Eng 21-9
Communications Worksheet.....................................................................................Eng 21-11
Standard GPI I/O Input Worksheets .........................................................................Eng 21-13
Standard GPI I/O Output Worksheets ......................................................................Eng 21-14
Aux Panel GPI I/O Worksheet..................................................................................Eng 21-15
Custom Control Worksheets .....................................................................................Eng 21-18
Conversion Loop Worksheets...................................................................................Eng 21-20
Glossary of Terms GT
Index IX
A Word of Thanks
Congratulations on choosing the Ross Vision Multi-Definition Digital Production Switcher. You
have purchased the power and versatility of a digital Multi-Level Effects (MLE®) switcher that is
ready to take on all creative challenges in today’s competitive live production environment.
You’ll be pleased at how easily your Vision switcher fits into your overall working environment.
Operating Tip — When the DHCP is set to On, you can use the Refresh button to poll the
server for the current network address information.
Note — If the DHCP option in On, the remaining settings are automatically configured. If the
DHCP is Off, you will have to manually enter values into all the fields.
In This Chapter
This chapter provides a basic introduction to the Vision switcher, including an overview of the
boards in the control panel and frame, as well as an introduction to the various ports, and video
buses.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Equipment Overview
• Control Panel Modules
• Frame Boards
• Communication Ports
• Tally Ports
• GPI I/O Port
• Video Routing
• Video Formats
• CPU Structure
• Board Labelling
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10 RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
BKGD PV
2
PRIOR LIMIT
3
CUT CUT CUT CUT
EFF
ATTRIB 4 5 6
1 RATE DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015
SEL
PST
PATT
KEY
CHROMA
KEY
FILL
KEY
INV
MEM
MASK
ON
FLY
KEY
OFF
CHNL
MGMT
ALPHA
KEY
PV
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE RECALL
4 5 6
FADE MLE
MLE
2
CLIP/CC
ATTRIB 1
82 3
RATE
EFF
RATE
1
MLE
2
HOLD
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
. LINK
FRAMES 3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4
CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 4 control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 8 Tally Ports, 2 PS/2 Ports,
4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the frame, and a
Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
“Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15 for more information on these communication ports.
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
2 RECALL 7 1 8 9 STORE 3
CUT CUT CUT CUT
4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ RATE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC 4 85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
9
CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ ATTRIB HOLD
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
. LINK
FRAMES 3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4 CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 3 control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 6 Parallel Tally Ports, 2
PS/2 Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the
frame, and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
“Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15 for more information on these communication ports.
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10 7 8 9
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
3
RECALL STORE
2
ATTRIB 4
1 5 6
EFF
RATE DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
CUT CUT CUT CUT
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
ROLL AUTO
0
EFF KEY CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO
BANK ENTER CLIP TRANS
DISS RATE TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS
11 MLE 1 MLE 2
4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6
TRANSITION KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY POSITIONER
AUTO SELF MATTE KEY BORD BORD SHOW
SEL
PST
PATT
KEY
CHROMA
KEY
FILL
KEY
INV
MEM
MASK
ON
FLY
KEY
OFF
CHNL
MGMT
ALPHA
KEY
PV
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC 4
85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ ATTRIB HOLD
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
. LINK
FRAMES 3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
ROLL AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
CUT BANK CLEAR ENTER CLEAR
CLIP TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS 4 DISS RATE 4
On the rear of the Vision 2X control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 6 Tally Ports, 2 PS/2
Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the frame,
and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
“Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15 for more information on these communication ports.
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
2 RECALL 7 1 8 9 STORE 3
CUT CUT CUT CUT
4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ RATE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC 4 85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
9
CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ ATTRIB HOLD
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
. LINK
FRAMES 3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4 CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 3M control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 6 Parallel Tally Ports, 2
PS/2 Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the
frame, and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
“Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15 for more information on these communication ports.
PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ ATTRIB
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
.
FRAMES 3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4
11 MLE 1 MLE 2
4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 9
CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 2M control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 4 Tally Ports, 2 PS/2
Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the frame,
PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
MLE RECALL
4 5 6
FADE MLE
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
.
FRAMES 3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4
11 MLE 1 MLE 2
4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 9
CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 2 control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 4 Parallel Tally Ports, 2
PS/2 Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the
frame, and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
“Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15 for more information on these communication ports.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
7 4
CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT
MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC
85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
ATTRIB
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
.
3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS BANK CLEAR ENTER
4 DISS RATE 4
11 MLE
PGM
MLE
PV 4
PGM PV SRC
SOURCE
ID 5 SAFE
TITLE
CUT FADE
6 015
TRANSITION POSITIONER
SEL
10
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
9
2
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ HOLD
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 1M control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 2 Parallel Tally Ports, 2
PS/2 Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the
frame, and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
“Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15 for more information on these communication ports.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
7
4 5 6
MLE RECALL FADE MLE
1 CLIP/CC RATE 1
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
.
3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS BANK CLEAR ENTER
4 DISS RATE 4
11 MLE
PGM
MLE
PV 4
PGM PV SRC
SOURCE
ID 5 SAFE
TITLE
CUT FADE
6 015
TRANSITION POSITIONER
SEL
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 1 control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 2 Parallel Tally Ports, 2
PS/2 Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the
Note — The Touchscreen Display is an option with the Vision 1, and 2 control panels. If you
do not have the Touchscreen Display, an LCD computer monitor with a DVI-D connector is
required.
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE
Frame
The frame of the Vision switcher performs all the video routing and manipulation of the switcher.
The frame consists of a chassis with a midplane into which all the frame boards are installed.
Boards are installed into both the front and the rear of the frame.
Frame Rear
The rear of the frame is where all of the Video Input and Video Output Boards are located, as
well as the communications ports on the Frame CPU Board. The rear of the MD (Figure 2.10),
QMD (Figure 2.11), and MD-X, and Octane/QMD-X (Figure 2.12) frames are shown below.
Frame
A CPU Board
B
Video
Output Board
C
Video
D
Input Boards
B
Video
Output Board
C
Video
D
Input Boards
E Video Output
or Video Input
Board
Frame
A
CPU
Board
B
E
Video
Input
F Boards
I
Video
J Output
Boards
K
Frame Front
The front of the frame is where the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards, Video Processor Boards,
and, in the Octane/QMD-X, and MD-X frames, the Crosspoint Board are located. The number
and position of the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards, and Video Processor Boards depends on the
configuration and model of your frame.
The frame can be configured in a number of ways, depending on the number of MLEs, and
Squeeze & Tease DVE channels you require per MLE-pair. These requirements determine where
boards are installed in the frame. Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease” on page Eng 2-27 for
more information on where the Video Processor and Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards are
located in the frame. The front of the Octane/QMD-X, and MD-X frame (Figure 2.13), and the
QMD, and MD frame (Figure 2.14) are shown below.
S
T (Slot 2)
A
T
U
S
Power Supply
FAN
FAIL (Slot 3)
(Slot 4)
Power Supply
(Slot 5)
(Slot 6)
Power Supply
(Slot 7)
MAIN
(Slot 8)
POWER
Power Supply
(Slot 9)
Power Supply
(Slot 1)
Slot 0
(Slot 2)
Power Supply
(Slot 3)
Keyers Module
The Keyers Modules consists of the Effects Keyer Board that supports the buttons and
mnemonic displays on the module, and a PMC that provides the communications with the
Control Panel CPU Module.
The Keyers Module comes in a 2-Keyer, 4-Keyer, and 8-Keyer configuration, and allow you to
perform all the Key type, Key modifier, and Key transitions for the assigned MLE. The 8-Keyer
configuration is only available with the MultiDSK™ option.
Note — The Vision 1 control panel does not support the Effects Memory Module. Instead, it
uses a single Global Memory Module.
The Effects Memory Module allows you to store and recall memories to individual MLEs. The
Program/Preset MLE does not support an Effects Memory Module.
Positioner Module
The Positioner Module consists of the Positioner Board that supports the buttons and positioner
on the module. The Positioner Module connects to the Preview Bus Module to communicate
with the Control Panel CPU Module.
The Positioner Module allows you to use the positioner to directly control external devices, such
as robotic cameras, or quickly alter menu values by moving the positioner in the appropriate axis.
The positioner can follow the menu system, or be locked to a specific external device, such as a
robotic camera.
Midplane
The Midplane is a non-removable board that provides the interconnections between the switcher
frame boards, the power supplies, and the fan assembly, as well as the routing through which all
video signals, communication, and control commands pass. The board has no active components.
Crosspoint Board
(4800AR-020)
The Crosspoint Board is a 144×144 switch that can route HD as well as SD video signals. Only
one Crosspoint Board can be installed in the front of the frame.
The QMD and MD frames do not support the Crosspoint Board, using the Video Input Board
with Crosspoint instead.
Note — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board is not compatible with the Video Processor Board
(4800AR-043).
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board provides 4 slots for the Squeeze & Tease MD Cards and
2 slots for the Squeeze & Tease WARP MD Cards. The board also provides local control as
well as video routing and power to these cards.
How the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards are installed in the frame depends on the type of
frame, and how the frame is configured for the number of MLEs and Squeeze & Tease DVE
channels that are required. Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease” on page Eng 2-27 for more
information on where the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards are located in the frame.
Power Supplies
Each frame requires at least one or two power supplies, depending on the type and size of frame,
to provide enough power to operate. Additional Redundant power supplies can be installed to
Note — If a power supply fails, the Power Fail indicator on the Touchscreen Display lights,
indicating that there is a problem with one of the power supplies.
2 4
3 5 6 7
Figure 2.15 Communication Ports on the Rear of the Vision Control Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6
LTC
2
1. LAN Ports
These 2 RJ-45 ports support standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet communication for connection
to the Vision control panel network hub, or switch for external device control, upgrades, image
transfer, and the external backup of switcher setups. Only the LAN 1 port should be used to
connect to the Vision control panels.
2. GP I/O Port
The single DB25 GP I/O port is used to connect to a GP I/O distribution system, providing 10
pins for GPI Inputs and 10 pins for GPI Outputs to the switcher. A single pin is provided for
ground. These GPIs can be used to trigger transitions, custom controls, or recall a memory
registers on the switcher.
There are 4 additional pins on the port that are used as a power-fail relay. These normally closed
relays open in the event of a power failure, or other switcher failure that may prevent reliable
program output.
3. Peripheral Ports
These 4 DB9 serial ports are used to connect to external equipment such as Editors. Peripheral
ports support both RS-232 and RS-422 communication in a Straight Through or Null
configuration.
4. Panel Port
The single 8-pin RJ-45 Panel port is used to connect to the legacy Synergy control panel and
provides all the communication between the control panel and frame.
5. USB Ports
These 2 USB ports are used to connect to supported USB devices.
6. Time Code Input
The single Time Code Input port is used to connect to an external time reference for
synchronization.
Tally Ports
The Vision control panel provides 36 tallies as standard, with 18 tallies per port (Figure 2.18).
Depending on the Vision control panel you have, extended tallies can be installed in groups of 36.
Tallies 1-18 Tallies 37-54 Tallies 73-90 Tallies 109-126
GP I/O Port
CPU
LTC
2
10/100 10/100 USB
Figure 2.19 The GP I/O Port on the CPU Board of the Frame
There are 10 GPI Inputs that can be used to trigger transitions, custom controls, or memory
recalls on the switcher in different areas, or MLEs. Setup is done through the menu system,
allowing you to associate a GPI Input with a Function, and specify which Area, or MLE, you
want that function to be performed in. If you select custom control as the function, you must
specify the custom control you want to execute, rather than the area. GPI Inputs can also be used
to activate a tally.
There are 10 GPI Outputs that can be used to trigger events on external equipment. Like the GPI
Inputs, setup is done through the menu system, allowing you to configure the trigger type and
level for each GPI. Output GPIs are typically triggered using custom controls.
Crosspoint Matrix
The crosspoint matrix allows you to route a video signal from any Input BNC to any, or all,
Output BNC. Video signals are received by the Input BNC and sent to the Crosspoint.
Depending on how the switcher is currently operating, the Crosspoint will send the video signals
to the Video Processor and Squeeze & Tease Carrier for any video manipulation that is
required. The manipulated video signals are then sent back to the Crosspoint to be routed to the
desired Video Output, and finally to the Output BNC.
Video flow through the crosspoint to the other boards in the frame depends on the frame you are
using and how it is configured.
Note — Video manipulation can only occur on video signals that are in the same video format
as the switcher is currently operating in. Non-native video formats must be converted before
they can be manipulated. Refer to the section “Setting Up a Conversion Loop” on page Eng
16-2 for more information on up/down converters.
16 8
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor Squeeze & Tease
(16 Inputs) Board MD Carrier
8 16
16 8
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor Squeeze & Tease
(16 Inputs) Board MD Carrier
8 16
4
Video Output Board 16 CPU Board
(16 Outputs) Global-Store
4
Note — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board is not compatible with the Video Processor Board
(4800AR-043).
16 8
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor Squeeze & Tease
(16 Inputs) Board MD Card
8 16
4
Video Output Board 16 CPU Board
(16 Outputs) Global-Store
4
4
Video Output Board 16 CPU Board
(16 Outputs) Global-Store
4
Note — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board is not compatible with the Video Processor Board
(4800AR-043).
Note — If a Video Output Board is installed in Slot E, a total of 32 Input BNCs and 24
Output BNCs will be available.
MD Crosspoint Matrix
16 8
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor Squeeze & Tease
(16 Inputs) Board MD Card
8 16
4
Video Output Board 16 CPU Board
(16 Outputs) Global-Store
4
Video Processor
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-040 and 4800AR-041) performs most of the
non-Squeeze & Tease video manipulation for the switcher. Background, Key, Alpha, DVE and
Utility signals are all sent to the Video Processor and returned as Program, Preview, Clean, and
DVE video and alpha.
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-043) performs all of the video manipulation, including 2D
DVE effects, for the switcher. Background, Key, Alpha, DVE and Utility signals are all sent to
the Video Processor and returned as Program, Preview, Clean, and DVE video and alpha.
Note — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board is not compatible with the Video Processor Board
(4800AR-043).
The number and placement of the Video Processor Boards in the frame depends on the frame you
have and how it is configured.
Figure 2.24 Video flow through the Video Processor for MLEs 1 and 2
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following inputs:
• 2 MLE BKGD video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 MLE PST video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 1 Video video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 1 Alpha video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 2 Video video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 2 Alpha video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 3 Video video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 3 Alpha video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 4 Video video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 4 Alpha video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following outputs:
• 2 PGM video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 PV video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Clean Feed video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Utility Bus Out video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
Utility 1
Utility 2
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following inputs:
• 2 MLE BKGD video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 MLE PST video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 1 Video video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 1 Alpha video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 2 Video video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 2 Alpha video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Aux Loopthrough video feeds.
• 2 Utility video feeds.
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following outputs:
• 2 PGM video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 PV video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Clean Feed video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Aux Loopthrough video feed.
Note — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board is not compatible with the Video Processor Board
(4800AR-043).
The number and placement of the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards in the frame depends on the
frame you have and how it is configured.
Note — The inputs and outputs for the Squeeze & Tease Carrier in Slot 8 are the same as
the inputs for the Squeeze & Tease Carrier in Slot 3, except that they are for MLE 3 and
MLE 4, not MLE 1 and MLE 2.
2
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
4
2
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
4
2
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
4
2
Video Processor Board Video Processor Board
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
(MLE 1 & 2) (MLE 3 & 4)
4
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
Figure 2.26 Video flow to and from a shared Squeeze & Tease Carrier
2
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
4
2
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
4
2
Video Processor Board
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
4
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
Figure 2.27 Video flow to and from a dedicated Squeeze & Tease Carrier
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in both the shared and dedicated configuration, has the
following inputs:
• 8 video feeds to the Squeeze & Tease MD Cards (2 per card).
• 4 video feeds to the Squeeze & Tease WARP Cards (2 per card).
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in both the shared and dedicated configuration, has the
following outputs:
• 16 video feeds from the Squeeze & Tease MD Cards (4 per card).
• 4 video feeds from the Squeeze & Tease WARP Cards (2 per card).
1080i 59.94
Scan Lines Interlaced Frequency
or
Progressive
Scan Lines
720
Figure 2.30 A 720 video signal has 720 scan lines by 1280 vertical pixels
Since each scan line starts from a vertical pixel, there are 720 rows of pixels, or scan lines, being
drawn horizontally. The same is true of a video signal with 1080 vertical scan lines, which
corresponds to a 1920×1080 pixel image.
Field 1 Field 2
Interlaced
Frame 1 (Field 1 + Field 2)
Figure 2.31 An Interlaced Video Format Draws Field 1 and Field 2 Separately, to Create a Frame
Both Field 1 and Field 2 must be drawn to create Frame 1. If you are using field or frame
numbers as a counter, you should remember that you must double the number if you are
converting from frames to fields. For example, a 4 frame delay is equal to an 8 field delay.
Progressive
A Progressive scan video format draws each scan line in sequence, starting from the top of the
screen and working to the bottom. Unlike Interlaced, with Progressive scan the entire image is
drawn at one time, in a single pass (Figure 2.32). This means that there are no fields in a
Progressive scan image.
Progressive
Frame 1
Figure 2.32 A Progressive scan video format draws each line in sequence
Because there are no fields in a Progressive scan video signal, you cannot use it as a reference
signal for an Interlaced video signal. Because the Interlaced video format requires information
about when each field is being drawn, you must use a Progressive scan video format as reference
for a Progressive scan video signal.
Frequency
In the previous sections we learned that a video image is comprised of a number of horizontal
scan lines that are drawn in either a Progressive or Interlaced format. The length of time it takes
to draw the scan lines from the top of the screen to the bottom in a single pass is called the
Frequency, and is measured in Hertz (Hz). With a Progressive scan video format, the frequency
is the time it takes to draw the entire image. With an Interlaced video format, the frequency is the
time it takes to draw 1 field, or half, of the image (Figure 2.33).
Interlaced Progressive
Field 1 Frame 1
(1/50 sec at 50 Hz) (1/50 sec at 50 Hz)
Figure 2.33 Interlaced and Progressive video formats with the same frequency
For example, an interlaced format of 1080i 50 Hz draws 50 fields per second. Compare this to a
Progressive scan format of 720p 50 Hz which draws 50 frames per second. Notice that the
Interlaced format is actually only drawing 25 frames (Field 1 plus Field 2) per second, where the
Progressive scan format is drawing the full 50 frames per second.
REG:00 Memory0
M:015 D:008 F:20
Figure 2.34 Transition Rate Information in the Global Memory System Module
Important — When you switch reference formats, you must perform a soft reset of the
switcher in order to load the default rates for the format you have set.
Note — Where a white square is present in the label string, letters may be written within the
square to indicate a minor variation on the board itself.
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on unpacking, installing, and basic cabling for your Vision
switcher.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Unpacking Your Switcher
• Opening and Closing the Frame Door
• Frame Installation
• Control Panel Installation
• Frame to Control Panel Cabling
• Video Input Cabling
• Video Output Cabling
• Button Inserts
• Power Supply Connections
• Power Fail Indicators
Warning Hazardous Voltage — This apparatus, when equipped with multiple power
supplies, can generate high leakage currents. To reduce the risk of electric shock, ensure that
each individual supply cord is connected to its own separate branch circuit with an earth
connection.
Caution — The frame door must be installed on the frame for proper cooling. Leaving the
frame door off may cause the frame to overheat, resulting in unexpected behavior or damage to
equipment.
Important — All cables must be run in accordance with good engineering practices. Ensure
that there is sufficient room for the cable and that enough slack is left in the cable run to permit
long, gentle bends. Always install cables so that they will not be subjected to physical abuse.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–1
Unpacking Your Switcher
A Vision switcher is usually shipped in two, or more, boxes, depending on the options you
purchased with your switcher. These boxes may vary, but usually contain the following:
• Box 1 — This box contains the frame, with all the required boards installed.
• Box 2 — This box contains the control panel, touchscreen display, cables, and manuals.
Note — The Touchscreen Display is an option with the Vision 1 and 2 control panels. If you
do not have the Touchscreen Display, an LCD computer monitor with a DVI-D connector is
required.
Once the boxes are unpacked, check the contents against the packing list to ensure that all items
are included. If any items are missing or damaged, contact your sales representative or Ross
Video Limited immediately.
Static Discharge
Serial Numbers
Serial numbers have been implemented to allow Ross Video to properly track which options have
been purchased by each customer. Switchers have serial numbers installed (in flash memory) at
the factory.
Eng 3–2 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Opening and Closing the Frame Door
If you are installing hardware options, or replacing a circuit board or power supply, you must
remove and re-install the frame door.
Caution — The frame door must be installed on the frame for proper cooling. Leaving the
frame door off may cause the frame to overheat, resulting in unexpected behavior or damage to
equipment.
Octane/QMD/X Frame
The door on the Octane/QMD-X and QMD frames swings open, allowing for quick access to the
boards and cards in the frame. The door can also be completely removed for greater access into
the frame.
1. Gently pull the door latch out and rotate it to release the door. The Octane/QMD-X door
has two latches.
Top of Frame
Frame Door
Door Latch
Door Hinge
Door Swing
Direction
Operating Tip — To remove the door from the frame completely, open the door to its full
extent. The door will be perpendicular to the front of the frame. Lift the door directly up to
unhook it from the hinge pins and remove the door from the frame.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–3
MD/X Frame
Top of Frame
Door Retainer
Frame Door
Door Latch
2. With both hands, grasp the sides of the door, and gently lift it. Rotate the bottom towards
you until the bottom edge clears the pivoting tongue on which it rests, and the door
retainer is free of the frame top plate.
3. Move the door away from the frame, and place it on a clean, flat surface.
Frame Door
2. When you are satisfied that the door is resting properly, firmly press the top of the door
until the latch pops into place and is secure.
Eng 3–4 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Frame Installation
This section gives an in-depth overview on how to install the frame into your facility. For
information on the dimensions of your frame, refer to the section “Frame Dimensions” on
page Eng 20-6.
The Vision switcher has an operating temperature range of 0 to 35 degrees Celsius.
Use the following guidelines when installing the frame into your equipment rack:
• Install the frame so as to ensure maximum stability, and adequate ventilation during
operation.
• Ensure that both sides of the frame are clear, so that airflow through the frame is not
restricted in any way.
• If possible, but not required, leave a 1RU space above the frame to facilitate installation
and removal of the frame door.
• The frame should be installed in a dry, dust free, and easily accessible location.
To ensure maximum stability, the frame must be mounted to the rack using the 2 Support
Brackets that are located at the rear of the frame. These brackets are included in your
Installation Kit.
Notice — Failure to install both the Support Brackets, or Rack Mount Arms, as described
will void the warranty.
1. Remove the front door from the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information on removing and installing the
frame door.
2. Using standard rack mounting bolts (not supplied) install the frame into the rack.
3. Install the Rack Mount Arms or Support Backets as follows:
• If you have an Octane/QMD-X frame, refer to the instructions that came with your
Rack Mount Kit.
• If you have a QMD frame, use standard rack mounting bolts (not supplied) to attach
the support brackets to the Rear Panel Mounting Flange (Figure 3.4). The support
brackets are adjustable to accommodate different rack sizes.
Rear Mounting
Flange
Support
Bracket
Rack
4. Inspect all the boards in the frame to ensure that they are properly seated.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–5
5. Inspect all power supplies installed in the frame to ensure that they are properly seated
and that the power switch is in the OFF position.
6. If you need to install or remove any of the boards or cards in the frame, refer to the
section “Removing and Installing Frame Boards” on page Eng 4-18.
7. Re-install the frame door.
Operating Tip — Even though you will be accessing the frame later in the installation
process, it is a good practice to put the frame door on when you are not working in the frame.
This protects the boards and circuits in the frame from accidental damage, and dust or debris.
Eng 3–6 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Control Panel Installation
This section gives an in-depth overview on how to install the Vision control panel into your
facility. This includes installing the control panel into, or on, the desk, installing the Touchscreen
display into a mount, and installing any Auxiliary Control Panels.
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
4 5 6 DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 PST CHROMA KEY MASK FLY CHAN KEY
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 4 5 6
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 PST CHROMA KEY MASK FLY CHAN KEY
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
4 5 6 DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3 MLE 4 SRC PV PGM SOURCE VTR SAFE CENTER TIME MASK HIDE CUT FADE
ID TC TITLE CLOCK PV OVER
PST TRANS KEY TRANS SEL SEL SEL SEL ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
1 2 3 4 MLE RECALL 4 5 6 FADE MLE
1 CLIP RATE 1
CUT CUT CUT CUT
MLE 1 2 3 EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 2 RATE 2 DEFLT
ROLL CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
CLIP TRANS 4 DISS BANK DEFLT ENTER RATE 4 LOCK
TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS
3. Gently slide the control panel into the cutout in the desk. The control panel will drop into
the cutout from above and rest on the edge supports (Figure 3.7).
4. Check the clearances around the control panel and at the back for the cables.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–7
5. Install the Under-Desk Brackets on both sides of the control panel to secure the control
panel in the desk (Figure 3.8). There are six (6) Under-Desk Brackets for the Vision 4,
and four (4) for all other Vision control panels.
Vision 4 Only
Under-Desk Brackets
6. Additional screws (not provided by Ross Video) can be installed through the
Under-Desk Bracket into the desk to ensure the control panel does not move.
7. If desired, the Tie-Down Screws (4800FR-690) can be inserted up through the slots on
either side of the bottom of the control panel to prevent the panel top from being opened.
3. Check the clearances around the control panel and at the back for the cables.
4. If you need to secure the control panel in place, pre-drilled holes are provided in the
sides of the control panel tub for securing the control panel to the desk with screws.
Screws are not provided.
5. If desired, the Tie-Down Screws (4800FR-690) can be inserted up through the slots on
either side of the bottom of the control panel to prevent the panel top from being opened.
Note — The Touchscreen Display is an option with the Vision 1 and 2 control panels. If you
do not have the Touchscreen Display, an LCD computer monitor with a DVI-D connector is
required. Connect the LCD monitor to the DVI port on the back of the Vision control panel in
accordance with the instruction that came with the LCD monitor.
Eng 3–8 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Ross Video does not provide a mounting arm with the Vision control panel. When selecting a
mounting arm, you should consider the environment that the control panel will be operating in.
For example, in a mobile or truck environment, a more rigid mounting arm is needed to secure the
Touchscreen Display.
Operating Tip — Ross Video recommends the Humanscale M7 Desk Mount Flat Panel
Monitor Arm by Media Control Co., Inc. (mcergo.com).
In order to properly complete this procedure need the following Touchscreen Display cables and
equipment:
• DVI Cable — This is a standard DVI-D cable that connects to the DVI-D port on the
control panel and the DVI-D port on the Touchscreen Display.
• Control Cable — This is a network cable with an RJ-45 connector on both ends. This
cable connects to the Aux 1 port on the control panel and the PREV port on the
Touchscreen Display.
• USB Cable — This is a standard USB cable that connects to the USB port on back of the
control panel and the USB port on the Touchscreen Display.
• Mounting Arm — The user supplied mounting arm must have a VESA FDMI MIS-D
75 or 100, C compliant mounting bracket to support the Touchscreen Display.
VESA FDMI
Mounting Holes
PREV NEXT
2. Connect and secure one end of the DVI Cable to the DVI port on the back of the control
panel (Figure 3.11).
3. Connect and secure the other end of the DVI Cable to the DVI port on the touchscreen
display.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–9
Touchscreen Display
PREV NEXT
To Power
Supplies Vision Control Panel
4. Connect and secure one end of the Control Cable to the External Panel Link 1 port
on the back of the control panel.
5. Connect and secure the other end of the Control Cable to the PREV port on the
Touchscreen Display.
6. Connect one end of the USB Cable to a USB port on the back of the control panel. It
does not matter which port you use.
7. Connect the other end of the USB Cable to the USB port on the Touchscreen Display.
Eng 3–10 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Frame to Control Panel Cabling
This section gives an in-depth overview of how to connect the Vision control panel to the frame.
These connections include the network connection between the control panel and the frame, and
connecting the keyboard and mouse to the control panel.
Important — Do not connect the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to any of the External
Link ports on the back of the control panel. Doing so may damage the control panel.
1. Connect and secure one end of the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to the LAN1
port on the CPU Board at the back of the frame. (Figure 3.12)
Vision Control Panel
LTC A
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
PS 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(Canada 120V~only)
D
IN
100-120V~
220-240V~
47-63Hz 9A 650W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
E
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F
IN
PS 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
G
IN
(Canada 120V~only))
100-120V~
220-240V~
47-63Hz 9A 650W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
PS 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
(Canada 120V~only) J
100-120V~
220-240V~
47-63Hz 9A 650W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
PS 4
M
MAXIMUM
RATING
1950W
QMD-X Frame
Figure 3.12 Connecting the Vision Control Panel to the Frame (QMD-X Shown)
Important — It is recommended that you use only a 10/100mbps switch to connect the Vision
control panel to the frame. Using a 10/100/1000mbps (gigabit) switch may cause switcher
instability and/or loss of communication between the control panel and the frame. Programming
a 10/100/1000mbps (gigabit) switch to 100mbps is not recommended.
2. Connect and secure the other end of the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to your
local network (a local network switch for example). Refer to the documentation that
came with your network switch, or talk to your IT personnel, for more information on
setting up and using the switch.
3. Connect and secure a second CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to the LAN 10/100
port on the control panel. If you are connecting more than one control panel in a
MultiPanel application, start by connecting the Master Panel.
4. Connect and secure the other end of the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to the
same local network or switch.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–11
5. Repeat from Step (3.) for each Satellite Panel you are connecting to the switcher.
Note — The Vision control panel supports any standard 101-Key, 102-Key, or 104-Key
Enhanced Keyboards, and any standard PS/2 Mouse.
Mouse Keyboard
Figure 3.13 Keyboard and Mouse Ports on the Vision Control Panel
This completes the method for installing the keyboard and mouse.
Eng 3–12 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Video Input Cabling
This section discusses how to connect video signals to the Input BNCs of the Vision switcher.
Connect your input video signals to the BNCs on the Video Input Boards as required. Each input
is identified by the Slot the board is in, and the Number (1 to 16 inclusive) at the top left of the
BNC (Figure 3.14). For example, if you connect a video source to the BNC numbered 5 on the
Video Input Board in Slot C, this input will be identified as BNC C05.
The Video Input Board Slots for each frame are as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slots C, D, E, F, G, and H
• MD-X — Slots C, D, E, F, G, and H
• QMD — Slots C, D, and E (Slot E supports either a Video Input Board with 16 inputs
or Video Output Board with 8 outputs.)
• MD — Slots C, and D
Important — All cables must be run in accordance with good engineering practices. Ensure
that there is sufficient room for the cable and that enough slack is left in the cable run to permit
long, gentle bends. Always install cables so that they will not be subjected to physical abuse.
Operating Tip — A Video Input Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which sources have been connected to which BNCs, and how those BNCs need to be set up.
Refer to the section “Video Input Worksheet” on page Eng 21-2 for a copy of this worksheet.
LTC A
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 0 1
11 1
12 13
1 3 14
1 4 15
1 5 16
1 6
100-120V~ 220-240V~ 47-63Hz
9A 650W (Canada 120V~only)
OUT
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Input
PS 2
D
IN
BNCs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
E
MAXIMUM
RATING
1950W
Note — The Vision switcher passes all embedded audio and ancillary data signals, including
“closed captioning” that are present on the background video. The individual MLE program
outputs each have the ancillary data associated with the background video for that MLE.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–13
By default, the first button on the crosspoint bus is mapped to Black, the buttons following that
are mapped to the video inputs, starting with the upper most Video Input Board installed in the
frame. The last buttons on the bus are mapped to the four Global-Store channels, MLE Re-entries
(if installed), and Shift (Figure 3.15).
Global-Store Re-Entry
Normal Black C01 - C08 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3 Shift
On the Shifted crosspoint bus, the first two buttons are mapped to Color Background 1 and Color
Background 2, the next are mapped to each of the MLE-Stores (if installed), and the buttons
following that are mapped to the video inputs continuing from those on the unshifted bus. The
last button is the Shift button.
Operating Tip — If you want to verify inputs connected to not mapped to crosspoint buttons
by default, you will have to map those sources to crosspoint buttons manually.
Eng 3–14 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Video Output Cabling
This section discusses how to connect to the Output BNCs of the frame, and which Output BNCs
to connect monitors to for verifying inputs.
Connect your output cables to the BNCs on the Video Output Boards as required. Each output is
identified by the Slot the board is in, and the Number (1 to 16 inclusive) at the top left of BNC
(Figure 3.16). For example, if you connect a cable to the BNC numbered 5 on the Video Output
Board in Slot K, this input will be identified as BNC K05.
Important — All cables must be run in accordance with good engineering practices. Ensure
that there is sufficient room for the cable and that enough slack is left in the cable run to permit
long, gentle bends. Always install cables so that they will not be subjected to physical abuse.
Operating Tip — A Video Output Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which sources have been connected to which BNCs, and how those BNCs need to be set up.
Refer to the section “Video Output Worksheet” on page Eng 21-9 for a copy of this worksheet.
The Video Output Board Slots for each frame are as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slots I, J, and K
• MD-X — Slots I, J, and K
• QMD — Slot B, and E (Slot E supports either a Video Input Board with 16 inputs or
Video Output Board with 8 outputs.)
• MD — Slot B
LTC A
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Output
100-120V~ 220-240V~ 47-63Hz
9A 650W (Canada 120V~only)
OUT
B
BNCs
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 1
11 1
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 1
11 1
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16
PS 2
D
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Output
OUT
E
MAXIMUM
BNCs
RATING
1950W
Note — The Vision switcher passes all embedded audio and ancillary data signals, including
“closed captioning” that are present on the background video. The individual MLE program
outputs each have the ancillary data associated with the background video for that MLE.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–15
The following output sources are default mapped from the factory:
• Program:
› Octane/QMD-X — The main switcher program output is mapped to K01 by
default.
› MD-X — The main switcher program output is mapped to K01 by default.
› QMD — The main switcher program output is mapped to B01 by default.
› MD — The main switcher program output is mapped to B01 by default.
• Preview:
› Octane/QMD-X — The main switcher preview output is mapped to K02 by default.
› MD-X — The main switcher preview output is mapped to K02 by default.
› QMD — The main switcher preview output is mapped to B02 by default.
› MD — The main switcher preview output is mapped to B02 by default.
Note — If you have a half MLE switcher (a Vision 2.5 QMD-X for example), or you have the
MultiDSK™ option installed, the main switcher program and preview are locked to specific
Output BNCs. Refer to the section “Mix/DSK” on page Eng 8-19 for more information on the
default mapping for the half MLE switchers.
• Aux — The Aux outputs are mapped to the remaining Output BNCs in order.
Monitor Connections
Virtually any Output BNC of the switcher can be assigned as your program or preview output;
however, if you have the Mix/DSK or MultiDSK™ options installed, these outputs are locked to
specific Output BNCs. In order to verify the functionality of the switcher and the input video
sources, connect a monitor to the Output BNC that is default mapped to.
Important — All cables must be run in accordance with good engineering practices. Ensure
that there is sufficient room for the cable and that enough slack is left in the cable run to permit
long, gentle bends. Always install cables so that they will not be subjected to physical abuse.
If you are using a serial digital monitor, connection is direct. If you are using an analog monitor,
one of three D-A converters is required:
• Serial Digital to NTSC
• Serial Digital to PAL
• Serial Digital to Analog Component
For more information on the full line of Ross Video conversion equipment, contact your sales
representative or Ross Video Limited.
Eng 3–16 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Button Inserts
This section discusses how to install an insert film into a button on the Vision control panel.
Installing an insert film into a button allows you to name specific crosspoint or custom control
buttons, or to replace the default button names with those of a different language.
Important — Using insert films that do not meet the recommended criteria may damage the
button cap and diffuser.
If you would like to create your own insert films, they must meet the following criteria:
• All inserts must be created on a 0.1575 inch (4 millimetre) polyester film.
• All inserts must be created using a screen printing process.
• All inserts must be created using an epoxy based ink.
• All inserts must be cut the dimensions indicated (Figure 3.17).
0.444" 0.468"
0.326"
Large Printable
Medium
Small Area
• The text on the insert film should fit within the white area in the center of the film
(Figure 3.17) to be visible through the cap.
• The insert films must cut with 0.020 inch (0.50 millimetre) rounded corners. This is to
allow the insert films to easily fit into the cap.
Cap Assembly
Switch Assembly
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–17
2. Remove the Lens from the Diffuser by using your fingernail, or common end micro
screwdriver, to pry the two apart (Figure 3.19).
Lens
Diffuser
3. Place the Insert Film into the Lens so that the readable side is facing up. The notches on
the sides of the Lens must be at the sides of the text on the Insert Film, and not on the
top or bottom (Figure 3.20).
Lens
T
Insert Film
U
C
Diffuser
Figure 3.20 Installing the Insert Film into the Cap Assembly
4. Aligning the notches on the sides of the Lens and Diffuser, press the Lens and Diffuser
together until they click together (Figure 3.20).
5. Aligning the notches on the sides of the Cap Assembly to the tabs on the side of the
Switch Assembly, press Cap Assembly down onto the Switch Assembly with a rolling
motion until they click together (Figure 3.21).
Cap Assembly
Switch Assembly
Eng 3–18 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Power Supply Connections
Both the Vision control panel and frame have removable power supplies that connect to mains
power to provide the operational power for the switcher. This section describes how to connect
the power supplies to the AC outlet.
Note — Refer to the section “Important Regulatory and Safety Notices to Service
Personnel”, at the beginning of this manual, for correct line cord information.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — This apparatus, when equipped with multiple power
supplies, can generate high leakage currents. To reduce the risk of electric shock, ensure that
each individual supply cord is connected to its own separate branch circuit with an earth
connection.
In order to properly complete this procedure you need the following cables:
• Power Cable — One power cable per power supply is required.
Note — Refer to the section “Important Regulatory and Safety Notices to Service
Personnel”, at the beginning of this manual, for correct line cord information.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–19
Note — A Power Cord Retaining Clip is provided with your installation kit to prevent the
power cord from accidentally being removed from the power supply. Refer to the documentation
that came with your power cord clip for installation information.
In order to properly complete this procedure you need the following cables:
• Power Cable — One power cable per power supply is required.
Caution — Always connect the External Power Supply to the Touchscreen before connecting
the AC mains power. Connecting the power supply to the AC mains power before connecting to
the Touchscreen could damage the Touchscreen.
2. If purchased, connect and secure the Secondary GlobTek External Power Supply to
the PS2 port on the back of the Touchscreen Display
3. Connect the power cables into the appropriate AC outlets.
Eng 3–20 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Power Fail Indicators
At the bottom of the Touchscreen Display there are two Power Fail indicators that show the
current state of the power supplies on the control panel and the frame.
• Panel Fail — This indicator lights to show that there is a problem with the power
supplies or fans in the control panel.
• Frame Fail — This indicator lights to show that there is a problem with the power
supplies or fans in the frame. This could be a complete power failure, or the failure of a
power supply.
Power Failure
When the Vision switcher experiences a power failure, the control panel and frame react as
follows:
• Control Panel Power Loss — If the control panel loses power, the frame is unaffected
and the switcher continues to pass video. When power is restored to the control panel, the
settings of the control panel before power was lost are restored.
• Frame Power Loss — If the frame loses power, the Frame Fail indicator lights and the
splash screen is shown on the Touchscreen Display. When power is restored to the frame,
the Frame Fail indicator clears and the control panel returns to the Default State.
• Complete Power Loss — If both the control panel and the frame lose power, the
switcher returns to the Default State when power is restored.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–21
Eng 3–22 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Initial Setup and Verification
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on how to initially set up and verify the video signals for your
Vision switcher.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Powering Up and Powering Down the Switcher
• Network Setup
• Network Security
• MultiPanel Setup
• Reference Connection and Setup
• Input Verification
• Functional Check
• Removing and Installing Frame Boards
• Resetting the Switcher
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–1
Powering Up and Powering Down the Switcher
This section describes how to power up and power down the control panel and the frame.
Note — The control panel will not start up properly if there is a USB flash drive in the USB port
on the control panel. You must remove the USB flash drive from the USB port on the control
panel before powering the control panel up.
1. Lift up on the control panel lid to gain access to the control panel tub.
2. Toggle the Primary and, if installed, Secondary AC Power switches for the control
panel to ON. The power switches are located inside the control panel tub (Figure 4.1).
Power Switch Power Switch
Secondary Primary
Power Power
Supply Supply
3. Press the Control Panel CPU Module Power Switch. The control panel starts to power
up.
4. Close the control panel lid.
5. Remove the door from the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information.
6. Find the Frame Power Supplies located on the right hand side, inside the frame (Figure
4.2). The yellow Standby indicator should be lit, indicating that AC power is connected
to the power supply, but the power supply is not turned on.
Eng 4–2 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Power Supply
Slot 1
Slot 2
Power Supply
Slot 3
Figure 4.2 The Frame Power Supplies are Located on the Right Side of the Frame (QMD Shown)
Note — If the green Power indicators on all power supplies are not lit, refer to the section
“Frame Power Supply” on page Eng 18-12 for information on diagnosing a power supply.
8. Check that the green Status indicators on the Cooling Fan Board, on the left side of the
frame, come on, indicating that all the cooling fans are operating. If the green Status
indicators do not come on, Refer to the section “Frame Fan Failure” on page Eng 18-8
for information on replacing a cooling fan.
9. Check that the blue Heartbeat indicator on the front of the boards installed in the frame
come on and start flashing. It may take a few seconds for all the boards to start up. If the
Heartbeat indicator on a board does not start up after 5 minutes, remove the board and
re-install it.
10. Install the door back on the frame.
11. On the control panel, the Main Menus is shown on the Touchscreen Display.
Note — Only the Master Panel can perform a system shutdown. The System Shutdown
Menu is not accessible from the Satellite Panels.
1. Press HOME More System Shutdown Shut Down. The system prompts
you to confirm the shutdown. Once confirmed, the switcher powers down.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Even though the switcher has been shut down, the
power supplies are still active until they have been physically switched off.
2. Open the front door of the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–3
3. Confirm that the System Status indicators on the left side of the frame are flashing
Green, indicating that it is safe to turn the power off.
4. Power off the frame as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X/MD-X
› Locate the Main Power switch on the Cooling Fan Carrier on the left side of
the frame and toggle it to OFF.
› Toggle the Power switch on each Power Supply to OFF.
• QMD/MD
› Locate the Power Supplies on the right side of the frame and toggle the
Power switch on each one to OFF.
5. Wait about 6 seconds for the system to discharge any residual power. The Status
indicators will go out.
6. Lift up on the control panel lid to gain access to the control panel tub.
7. Toggle the Primary and, if installed, Secondary AC Power switches for the control
panel to OFF. The power switches are located inside the control panel tub (Figure 4.1).
8. Close the control panel lid.
Eng 4–4 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Network Setup
This section provides instructions for configuring the network setup for your Vision switcher,
including the frame and control panel. This allows proper communication between the control
panel(s) and the frame, as well as any Ethernet based external devices on the same sub-network.
Software upgrades can also be performed over a network by connecting to the web interface of
the frame.
If the frame is using the default network settings, the control panel will automatically detect the
frame on power up. No network setup is required. Once connected, you can change the network
settings of each Vision control panel. You must restart the switcher each time you want to apply
different network settings.
You can connect up to nine (9) Vision control panels to a single MD/X or Octane/QMD/X frame.
In either a single panel or MultiPanel configuration, you must configure a Master Panel. Once the
Master Panel is configured, up to eight (8) Satellite Panels can be configured.
Important — Contact your IT department before connecting the control panel or frame to
your facility network to ensure that there are no conflicts. They will provide you with the network
information for the frame and control panels (Table 4.1). Refer to the section “Default Network
Settings” on page Eng 20-8 for the factory default network address and settings of the switcher.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–5
3. Click Other... Network to display the Network Page. This page allows you to
change the network configuration of the frame network ports, as well as enter the current
IP Address of the Master Panel, and Satellite Panels.
Operating Tip — To activate the LAN 2 port, enter an IP Address and Network Mask for
LAN 2. The Gateway is common for both the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports.
5. Enter the IP address for the Master Panel, and each Satellite Panel, you are connecting to
the frame as follows:
• Enter the Master Panel IP address in the IP Address Master Panel field. This does
not change the IP address of the Master Panel. To set the IP address of a control
panel, you must set it from the panel.
• Enter the Satellite Panel IP addresses in the IP Address Satellite X field for each
Satellite Panel you want to use with the frame. The satellite number is the Panel ID
that is set on the Satellite Panel.
6. Press Change and Reboot to restart the switcher and apply the new settings.
Next, you must set up the control panels with the corresponding IP address, and Panel ID.
Eng 4–6 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
1. Ensure that the control panel and frame are connected to the same subnet.
2. Place the control panel into diagnostic mode by pressing HOME three (3) times quickly.
3. Press HOME Setup More Network Setup.
Operating Tip — If you want to cancel the changes you have made to the network
information, press Revert To Current on the Network Setup Menu to revert to the last saved
network settings.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–7
Network Security
The Vision switcher uses a standard ethernet connection for communication between the control
panel and the frame, as well as between some external devices and the switcher. Any time your
switcher is connected to a public network, it is important to follow certain precautions to ensure
that your switcher is not vulnerable. These precautions are as follows:
• Limit Access — Anyone who can access your network could also have access to your
sensitive data and equipment. Limit network access by keeping your production
equipment on a separate network segment or use a firewall. Contact your IT department
for more information about how your network is set up.
• Change Default Passwords — Change the Web Interface password for your switcher.
Refer to the section “Vision Web Interface Account” on page Eng 6-2 for more
information.
• Disable Unused Services — The Vision switcher provides access to a number of default
services as listed below. These services can be disabled by Ross Video Technical
Support if required for added security.
› Web Server — This service is used for the Web Interface.
› WebDAV — This service is used to transfer images and animations to the switcher
for use with the internal Still-Stores.
› Telnet Server — This service is used for diagnostic and maintenance purposes.
Eng 4–8 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
MultiPanel Setup
To set up a MultiPanel system you must configure the network settings on each of the control
panels and frame, assign MLEs to each of the control panels, assign system permissions, and then
set up the video outputs for each of your Program MLEs.
Refer to the section “Network Setup” on page Eng 4-5 for information on setting the network
configuration for a MultiPanel system.
MLE Assignment
The MLE assignment sets which MLEs a specific control panel has access to, and can control.
The highest number MLE assigned to a control panel is the program MLE for that control panel.
This MLE is tallied for the control panel. The highest number MLE assigned to a control panel in
the entire switcher is the Program MLE for the switcher. This is the MLE that has the MultiDSK,
Half MLE, and Preview Overlay options.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation More MultiPanel.
Note — The MLE that has the MultiDSK, Half MLE, and Preview Overlay options is indicated
with Pgm MLE (full MLE), Pgm Mix (MixDSK), Pgm Multi (MultiDSK), or Mix Multi (Mix/DSK
and MultiDSK).
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–9
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Next, you must set up the Video Output BNCs for the Program MLEs. The Program output, and
Preview output, for the switcher is locked to the highest MLE assigned in the system. If you are
using different Program MLEs for different control panels, you must assign an output BNC to the
MLE X Program and MLE X Preview for that MLE, where X is the number of your MLE.
Refer to the section “Configuring Video Outputs” on page Eng 8-2 for information on assigning
the MLE Program and MLE Preview to an output BNC.
System Permissions
Each Satellite Panel can be granted permission to view and change the installation settings on the
switcher.
Operating Tip — Only one control panel can be accessing the Installation Menus at any
one time. To see which control panel is currently in the menu, and to force that control panel out
of the menu, press HOME Setup More More Inst. Menu Status. Press Force
Inst Menu Change to force the other control panel out of the Installation Menu.
Eng 4–10 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Reference Connection and Setup
The Flexible Reference system in the Vision switcher allows you to use an Interlaced video
format as the reference to operate the switcher in a video format of the same frequency. Choosing
a progressive video format as a reference limits you to operating the switcher only in that same
video format and frequency. For example, if you have a 1080i 59.94 Hz input reference you can
operate the switcher in 720p 59.94 Hz, but not 1080i 50 Hz. However, if you have a 720p
59.94 Hz input reference, you can only operate the switcher in 720p 59.94 Hz. If you need to
change frequencies, you can have multiple input references and switch between them as needed.
Note — If the reference loop is not connected, the loop BNC should be terminated with a
75ohm termination.
Connect the reference signal to one of the REF connectors on the Video Input Board. If an
additional reference is needed, a second Video Input Board with reference must be used.
Reference Connectors
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
LOCK
LOOP
Operating Tip — Always use a stable signal that is low in jitter, and that preferably
originates from a reliable analog test signal generator.
Note — The 1080p 59.94Hz, 1080p 50, and 1080p 29.97Hz video formats are not supported
by some older frame boards. If any of these boards are present in the frame, a warning
message is shown on the Main Menu and the board(s) is listed on the Status Menu.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–11
Table 4.2 Compatible Video Formats
Input Reference Usable Format
• 480i
• 480i 16:9
• 720p 59.94Hz*
480i
• 1080i 59.94Hz*
• 1080p 29.97Hz
• 1080p 59.94Hz (A)
• 576i
• 576i 16:9
576i • 720p 50Hz*
• 1080i 50Hz*
• 1080p 50Hz (A)
720p 59.94Hz • 720p 59.94Hz
720p 50Hz • 720p 50Hz
• 480i
• 480i 16:9
• 720p 59.94Hz
1080i 59.94Hz
• 1080i 59.94Hz
• 1080p 29.97Hz
• 1080p 59.94Hz (A)
• 576i
• 576i 16:9
1080i 50Hz • 720p 50
• 1080i 50Hz
• 1080p 50Hz (A)
1080p 24Hz • 1080p 24Hz
1080pSF 24Hz • 1080pSF 24Hz
1080pSF 23.98Hz • 1080pSF 23.98Hz
1080p 29.97Hz • 1080p 29.97
*Important — It is not recommended that you operate the switcher in these video formats
when you are using a composite sync (480i or 576i) reference signal.
The Vision switcher allows you to use any interlaced video format to operate the switcher in any
format of the same frequency; however, the use of 480i or 576i (Composite Sync) reference
signals for High Definition (720p or 1080i) video modes is not recommended. Using a
composite sync reference signal for High Definition video modes results in excessive jitter on the
video output of the switcher, falling outside the range specified by SMPTE-292M. This may
result in downstream equipment being unable to properly receive these signals.
The use of composite sync reference formats is recommended for Standard Definition video
modes only, and provides stable outputs with jitter performance in compliance with
SMPTE-259M specifications.
Eng 4–12 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Reference Setup
Depending on the input reference, and the MLE options purchased, you can select a number of
HD or SD video formats for the switcher to operate in. This is the native video format that all
video manipulation is performed in by the switcher.
The current input reference format (Reference mode) and video format (Video mode) that the
switcher is operating in are shown on the Main Menu. If the current input reference format is not
present or locked, the Reference mode text appears red.
If you have the MLE SD option installed on one or more MLEs, those MLEs will only be able to
operate in SD video formats; 480i, 576i, 480i 16:9, and 576i 16:9. The MLE MD options supports
all video formats.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation More Reference.
Reference Menu
2. Use the Input Board knob select the Video Input Board you have connected the
reference to.
Note — Video Input Boards that are not installed, or do not have a reference input, appear
gray and cannot be used as a reference input.
3. Use the Ref Format knob to select the reference format of the input reference.
4. Use the Video Format knob to select the video format you want the switcher to operate
in. The list of available formats will vary, depending on the format of the input reference
that you selected above and the MLE MD or MLE SD option that is installed.
5. Reset the video format of all Input BNCs to the video format of the switcher as follows:
• Press Reset Input Formats to have the switcher set all Input BNCs to the same
video format that the switcher is currently operating in.
6. Reset the video format of all Output BNCs to the currently selected video format as
follows:
• Use the Video Format knob to select the video format that you want to set all
Output BNCs to.
Note — When you reset all Output BNCs to the selected video format, this will include any Aux
Buses that are being used for SmartConversion. Refer to the section “Setting Up a Conversion
Loop” on page Eng 16-2 for more information.
• Press Reset Output Formats to have the switcher set all Output BNCs to the
currently selected video format. You are asked to confirm the change.
7. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–13
8. Accept or reject the changes you have made as follows:
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Important — When you switch reference formats, you must perform a soft reset (ALL+ALL)
in order to load the default Keyer, MLE, and dissolve rates for the format you have set.
Internal Reference
The Vision switcher can generate an internal reference signal that can be used for any internally
generated video signal. For example, you can use matte color, Global-Store images, or
MLE-Store images with the internally generated reference signal to test the functionality of the
switcher during initial setup.
Important — The internally generated reference signal cannot be used with external video
signals. The switcher will not be able to synchronize the external video signals without an
external reference.
Eng 4–14 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
For More Information...
• on working with different video formats, refer to the section “Video Formats” on
page Eng 2-31.
• on reference signal specifications, refer to the section “Video Characteristics” on
page Eng 20-14.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–15
Input Verification
The Vision switcher displays the currently assigned source for each crosspoint button on the
mnemonic display above the button. For internally generated sources, such as Black or
Global-Stores, the name describes the source, BLCK for example. For external video sources, the
default name is the BNC that the crosspoint button is assigned to. For example, button 2 on the
control panel is assigned to Input 001. The name In 001 is displayed above button 2.
Operating Tip — Verification of video sources is best done on the Program (PGM) Bus of
the bottom MLE. This is the bus that is fed directly out of the Program BNC. This procedure
assumes that all crosspoint selections are made on this bus.
1. The initial state, or reset state, of the switcher is to have Black selected on all buses.
Black should be displayed on the monitor.
2. Select crosspoint button 2 on the PGM Bus. The name In 001 should be shown in the
mnemonic display above the button.
3. Refer to your Input Worksheet and confirm that the source you have connected to In
001 is what is being displayed on the monitor.
• If the video signal displayed on the monitor is not what you have recorded on the
Input Worksheet for In 001, double-check the connections to the BNC to ensure
that sources have not been mislabelled.
4. Repeat Steps (2.) and (3.) for each crosspoint button on the PGM Bus that is mapped to
a BNC. The last 4 crosspoint buttons are mapped to internal sources.
5. Select Global-Store 1 on the PGM Bus. The name GS 1 is shown in the mnemonic
display above the button and the Global-Store Menu is shown on the Touchscreen
Display. Repeat this for the remaining global-store channels.
6. Press and hold the SHIFT button. The mnemonics change, indicating the sources that
are mapped to the crosspoint buttons on the shifted bus.
7. Select Color BKGD 1 on the PGM Bus. The name BKGD 1 is shown in the
mnemonic display above the button and the Matte Selection Menu is shown on the
touchscreen display.
8. Repeat Steps (2.) and (3.) for each crosspoint button on the shifted bus that is mapped to
a BNC.
To verify sources that are not mapped to crosspoint buttons, you must map those sources to
buttons and verify them that way.
Eng 4–16 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Functional Check
All Ross Video products undergo thorough quality control and testing before shipment. The
following functional check ensures that no damage has occurred during transit, and that all boards
are correctly installed.
To perform the functional check, a monitor must be connected to at least one of the outputs. Refer
to the section “Monitor Connections” on page Eng 3-16 for information on how to connect a
temporarily monitor for the verification of sources.
Operating Tip — Verification of video sources is best done on the Program (PGM) Bus of
the highest number MLE. This procedure assumes that all crosspoint selections are made on
this bus.
1. Perform a full software reset. Refer to the section “Resetting the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-24 for more information on performing a software reset.
2. Select a crosspoint button on the PGM Bus. This video source appears on the Program
monitor.
3. Select a different crosspoint button on the PST Bus. This video source appears on the
Preview monitor.
4. In the Transition Module for that MLE, select Dissolve (DISS) as the transition type.
5. While watching the Program monitor, move the Fader in the MLE Transition Module
from one limit to the other. The video on the Program monitor dissolves to the video
source you selected on the PST Bus and the selected crosspoint buttons on each bus will
switch, indicating that the new source is currently selected on the PGM Bus.
6. In the Transition Module for that MLE, select Wipe (WIPE) as the transition type.
7. While watching the Program monitor, move the Fader in the MLE Transition Module
from one limit to the other. The video on the Program monitor wipes to the video source
you selected on the PST Bus and the selected crosspoint buttons on each bus switch,
indicating that the new source is currently selected on the PGM Bus.
8. While watching the Program monitor, select different crosspoint buttons on the PGM
Bus, ensuring that the cuts are taking place.
9. If your control panel has multiple MLEs, re-enter one MLE into the PGM/PST MLE by
pressing the re-entry button on the crosspoint bus. Refer to the section “Default Input
Mapping” on page Eng 3-13 for more information on the location of the re-entry
buttons.
If you experienced problems with this test, ensure that the buttons and faders are working
properly, or check that the reference connections for the switcher are properly set up.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–17
Removing and Installing Frame Boards
The frame comes standard with all the circuit boards already installed. If daughter cards or boards
need to be installed, or replaced, you will have to either remove and install, or install the new
boards into the frame.
When a new board is installed, the switcher checks the current version of software on the board
and tries to upgrade it to the current version of the switcher. If the software on the board is the
same as the software on the switcher, there is no change. If the board has a software version that is
different than the version on the switcher, the switcher will upgrade the board to the same version
as the switcher. For this reason it is important that you upgrade your switcher to the latest version
of Vision software prior to installing a new board into the frame.
If you are installing one of the following options, refer to the documentation that came with your
hardware for detailed instructions on this option:
• Squeeze & Tease MD
• Squeeze & Tease WARP
• XFX Board (Dual Border Generator and MLE-Store)
Eng 4–18 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Table 4.3 Front Frame Boards
Slot Octane/QMD-X MD-X QMD MD
Slot 0 Fan Boarda Fan Board Fan Board Fan Board
Video Processor Board
Video Processor Board
Slot 1 (MLE 1&2 or
(All MLEs)
MultiViewer 4&3)
Video Processor Board
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Squeeze & Tease Carrier
Slot 2 (MLE 7&8b or (All MLEs) (All MLEs)
MultiViewer 2&1)
(Slot 1)
S
T (Slot 2)
A
T
U
S
Power Supply
FAN
FAIL (Slot 3)
(Slot 4)
Power Supply
(Slot 5)
(Slot 6)
Power Supply
(Slot 7)
MAIN
(Slot 8)
POWER
Power Supply
(Slot 9)
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–19
Power Supply
(Slot 1)
Slot 0
(Slot 2)
Power Supply
(Slot 3)
Eng 4–20 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Slot A A
Slot B B
Slot C C
Slot D D
Slot E E
Slot F F
Slot G G
Slot H H
Slot I I
Slot I J
Slot K K
Slot L L
Slot M M
Slot A A
Slot B B
Slot C C
Slot D D
Slot E E
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present in the frame as long as
any of the power supplies are connected to the AC power.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–21
Important — If you remove a board that is providing a resource that is being used on-air, that
resource will no longer be available when that board is removed.
6. Grasp both locking tabs and rotate them towards you and out towards the outer sides of
the frame. This unseats the board from the midplane.
7. Gently slide the board out of the frame and place it on a clean, flat, static-free surface.
8. Install the frame door when you are done removing boards from the frame.
Important — If the blades in the power connectors are bent or damaged, contact Ross Video
Technical Support. Do not attempt to install a damaged board.
3. Align the board with the guide rails and push the board into the slot. When the board
stops sliding freely, push firmly to seat the board, and secure it with the ejector tabs.
Important — If there is significant resistance when seating the board, remove the board from
the frame and inspect the connectors for bent pins or other damage to the connectors.
Eng 4–22 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Removing a Rear Frame Board
1. Locate the board you want to remove from the frame. Refer to the section “Frame
Board Locations” on page Eng 4-18 for information on where each board is located.
2. Label and remove any cables connected to the board so that they can be properly
connected again.
3. Unscrew the Locking Screws located at either end of the rear panel of the board you
want to remove (Figure 4.9).
Locking Locking
Screw Screw
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
LOCK
LOOP
4. Gently slide the board out of the frame and place it on a clean, flat, static-free surface.
Important — If the blades in the power connectors are bent or damaged, contact Ross Video
Technical Support. Do not attempt to install a damaged board.
3. Align the new board with the guide rails and slide the board into the frame until the
board stops sliding freely.
4. Unscrew the Locking Screws located at either end of the rear panel of the board, or
blank spacer, above or below the new board you are installing.
5. Pull the board you just unscrewed the Locking Screws from out of the frame about 1/4”
(6mm).
6. Push firmly and evenly on each side of the new board to seat it.
Important — DO NOT use the Locking Screws to seat or force the board into the slot. If you
have trouble seating the new board, contact Ross Video Technical Support.
7. Seat the board above or below the new board, and screw in the Locking Screws on both
boards.
8. The switcher upgrades the new board you have installed, if required.
9. Reconnect the cables to the board.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–23
Resetting the Switcher
If required, the Vision switcher can be reset from the control panel, returning the switcher to the
default state. This can be either a full restart of the switcher, or just the control panel, or a reset of
the software.
• Full Restart — The Full Restart affects hardware and software simultaneously,
physically powering down the switcher and powering it back up again. This is not the
same as powering the switcher off and back on again.
• Control Panel Restart — The Control Panel Restart restarts the only the control panel,
and does not affect the frame.
• Software Reset — A Software Reset affects software only, returning the switcher to the
default state.
Note — The control panel will not start up properly if there is a USB flash drive in the USB port
on the control panel. You must remove the USB flash drive from the USB port on the control
panel before powering the control panel up.
Full Restart
This function performs both a hardware and a software reset simultaneously. Switcher memory
registers, personality registers, installation registers, and custom control registers are not affected
by the reset, but all other switcher parameters (for example, the current state of the panel) are
reset. BLACK is selected on all buses.
Note — Only the Master Panel can perform a full restart. The System Shutdown Menu is not
accessible from the Satellite Panels.
Eng 4–24 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Note — Only the Master Panel can perform a panel restart. The System Shutdown Menu is
not accessible from the Satellite Panels.
Software Reset
The software reset function can be performed from either the Global Memory Module or any
individual Effects Memory Module on the control panel. Both methods are described below.
GLOBAL MEMORY
4 5 6
MLE RECALL FADE MLE
1 CLIP RATE 1
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
ATTRIB
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS MLE MLE
+/- .
3 ONLY RATE 3
• Individual MLEs (1-4) — To reset MLEs 1-4 individually, press and hold both the MLE
# button in the Recall and the MLE # button in the Store areas (Figure 4.12). Where the
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–25
# is the number of the MLE you want to reset. For example, to reset MLE 1, you would
press and hold the MLE 1 buttons. You can only reset MLEs that are assigned to your
control panel.
• Individual MLEs (5-8) — To reset MLEs 5-8 individually, toggle +4 on and press and
hold both the MLE # button in the Recall and the MLE # button in the Store areas
(Figure 4.12). Where the # is the number of the MLE you want to reset. For example, to
reset MLE 5, you would toggle +4 on, and press and hold the MLE 1 buttons. You can
only reset MLEs that are assigned to your control panel.
Note — You cannot reset an individual MLE from the 1-4 MLE and the 5-8 MLE at the same
time.
GLOBAL MEMORY
This completes the method for resetting an individual MLE, or all MLEs, from the Global
Memory System Module.
EFFECTS MEMORY
4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
RATE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE
0
EFF KEY
BANK ENTER
DISS RATE
This completes the method for resetting an individual MLE from the Effects Memory Module.
Eng 4–26 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Resetting From the Positioner Module
You can also reset the Crosspoint Group individually from the Positioner Module. This allows
you to reset an MLE or an Aux bus, depending on what is assigned to the Crosspoint Group.
1. Press and hold the SEL button on the Crosspoint Group that you want to reset. Refer to
the section “Panel Row” on page Ops 4-5 for more information on the Crosspoint
Group.
2. Press the CLEAR button on the Positioner Module. The Crosspoint Group will return
to the default state.
Default State
When you reset an MLE, Aux Bus, the entire switcher, or perform a complete restart, the switcher
returns to the default state.
Note — If you reset only an individual MLE, only that MLE is returned to the default state. The
rest of the MLEs will remain unaffected.
Note — All transition rates shown are for an Interlaced video format operating at 59.94 Hz. The
switcher automatically calculates the transition rate, based on the video format it is operating in.
• In the Effects Memory Module, the following memories and rates are set:
› REG:00 — Memory register 00 is preset
› Memory0 — Memory register 00 was last recalled
› MLE:015 — MLE transition rate is 15 frames
› Key:008 — Key transition rate is 8 frames
• In the Global Memory Module, the following memories and rates are set:
› REG:00 — Memory register 00 is preset
› Memory0 — Memory register 00 was last recalled
› M:015 — MLE transition rate is 15 frames
› D:008 — DSK transition rate is 8 frames
› F:20 — DSK fade-to-black transition rate is 20 frames
• Auto Select is selected as the Key type in each Keyer.
• The Key 4 Mode is set to External.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–27
Eng 4–28 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Using the Menu System
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on using the menu system, and adjusting and using the
Touchscreen Display of the Vision switcher.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Touchscreen Interface
• Menu System Basics
• Quick Navigation Buttons
• Menu Skins
• Control Panel Mnemonics
• Control Panel Displays
• Using the Naming Menus
• Help Features
• Screen Captures
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–1
Touchscreen Interface
Each large Vision switcher comes with an adjustable touchscreen display (Figure 5.1) that is used
to interface with the menu system of the switcher. As you operate the switcher, the menu system
follows what you are doing, displaying the appropriate menu. For example, if you select a
crosspoint that has been assigned to a robotic camera that is controlled from the switcher, the
Camera Head Control Menu for that camera is displayed. Similarly, if you fly a key, the
Squeeze & Tease Position/Crop Menu is displayed.
Note — The Touchscreen Display is an option with the Vision 1 and 2 control panels. If you
do not have the Touchscreen Display, an LCD monitor with a DVI-D connector is required.
HOME
UP
ONE
4
HOLD
1 3 2
HOME
UP 5
ONE
HOLD
7 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE 1
8 10 6 12 11 9
1. Control Buttons
To the left of the upper and lower displays there are three buttons that allow you to navigate the
menu system in the adjacent display. These buttons are as follows:
• HOME — Press this button to display the Main Menus. Pressing the HOME button next
to a display region shows the Main Menu 1-2 in that display region. The other display
region remains the same.
• UP ONE — Press this button to take the display region next to the button up one level in
the menu tree. For example, if you navigate to the Disk Menu and press UP ONE, you
will return to the Main Menus. Pressing the UP ONE button next to a display region
shows the menus from the next level up the menu tree in that display region.
• HOLD — Press this button to lock the displays to the current menus. Pressing the HOLD
button locks the upper display region to the current menu. The lower display region
remains unlocked. It is still be possible to go down levels of the menu tree, but you are
not able to go up past the level at which you pressed the HOLD button.
Eng 5–2 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• MORE — This button lights to indicate when it can be used to navigate to additional
pages of the current menu in the display region next to it. Pressing the MORE button next
to a display region shows the next page of the menu in that display region. A soft More
button is also present on the display.
2. Control Knobs
Next to upper and lower display regions there are three knobs that allow you to make menu
selection on the adjacent display. Each knob adjusts the menu item that is next to it.
If the Punchpad functionality is available for a menu item, pressing the knob next to a menu item
jumps the value to the nearest 10. If you double-press the knob, the value is defaulted.
Operating Tip — If you are using a mouse with the switcher, you can hover the mouse over
the knob and use the scroll wheel to make adjustments.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–3
12. Touchscreen Adjustment Buttons
The Touchcreen Adjustment Buttons allow you to adjust the characteristics, such as brightness
and contrast, of the touchscreen display.
Eng 5–4 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Menu System Basics
The menu system on the Vision switcher allows you to set up the switcher, interface with external
equipment, set up and perform complex shots or sequences, and record and edit custom controls.
The menu system is set up with a branching architecture, with the Main Menus as the starting
point of all menus. This is the menu that is displayed when you press the HOME button next to a
display region. Pressing the HOME button next to a display region shows the Main Menu 1-2 in
that display region. The other display region remains the same. If you do not have the
Touchscreen Display, you must use the Home Quick Navigation button to navigate to the Main
Menu 1-2.
From the Main Menus you can move down the tree by selecting one of the other menus in the
Navigation Area, or you can move laterally to additional pages of the menu by pressing the
More button. Pressing the More button on a display region displays the Main Menu 2-2 in that
display region. The other display region remains the same.
You can tell when there are additional pages to a particular menu by the title of the menu, whether
it is page 1-3 or 3-3, and whether the More button is lit or not. If the More button is not grayed
out, it indicates that there are additional pages to the current menu that are not displayed.
The touchscreen allows you to show two independent menus at once. By default, the lower region
is the main auto-follow menu for the switcher, and the upper region is a user mountable menu.
For example, you can mount the Global-Store Menu on the upper region and use the bottom
region for normal operation (Figure 5.2). This allows you to manage the Global-Store Menu
without having to navigate to the menu every time.
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE
Every menu on the switcher has the same layout, with a Menu Title, Main Area, Selection
Area, and Navigation Area (Figure 5.3).
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–5
2 1 3 4
HOME
5
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE
Eng 5–6 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
6. Main Areas
The main area of the menu is where the bulk of the information is displayed. This includes
helpful tips about using the menu, or information on the current state of the switcher. For
example, on the Main Menu 1-2 the main area provides the software version, whether the control
panel is a Master Panel or Satellite Panel, the video format that the switcher is currently operating
in, the input reference format, and the status of the Remote Enables and Video Correctors.
7. Navigation Areas
The navigation area of the menu contains up to six items that can be either a navigation button to
another menu, a toggle for a feature, or display a sub-menu that changes the items in the
Selection Area.
• Navigation Buttons have a down pointing arrow next to the name, indicating that if you
select this item you are taken to another menu.
• Toggle Buttons have a highlighted item beneath the title, indicating what is currently
active. This can be an On versus Off, or one feature versus another. Turning a feature on
may also activate different option for the same menu.
• Option Buttons will change the items currently available in the Selection Area, and the
Main Area. For example, selecting items in the Navigation Area of the
Communications Menu does not take you to another menu, but changes the items in the
Selection Area.
Figure 5.4 The Punchpad can be used to make selections on the menu system
When the punchpad icon is present, you can press the button next to the Selection Knob to
display the Punchpad (Figure 5.5). The Punchpad remains on screen until you close it or you
navigate away from the menu. Selecting another option on the menu, or pressing More does not
close the Punchpad.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–7
5 1
2
4 3
Eng 5–8 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Using the Positioner with the Menu System
When you select specific installation and operational menus, Positioner Icons appear next to the
knobs (Figure 5.6) on the lower display region, indicating that moving the positioner in that axis
adjusts the selection for that knob. Typically, two or three icons are shown, depending upon the
selected menu and function.
When these icons appear, you can adjust the selected function or parameter either with the
Selection Knobs or with the Positioner.
Figure 5.6 The Positioner can be used to make selection on the menu system
• When the left-right positioner icon ( ) appears, you can move the Positioner left and
right to make adjustments to this value.
• When the up-down positioner icon ( ) appears, you can move the Positioner up and
down to make adjustments to this value.
• When the circular positioner icon ( ) appears, you can twist the Positioner knob
clockwise and counter-clockwise to make adjustments to this value.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–9
Quick Navigation Buttons
The Quick Navigation buttons (Figure 5.7) allow you to control the display region next to the
buttons, or navigate to commonly used menus with a single button press. The additional Quick
Navigation buttons are displayed by pressing the Next button. Refer to the section
“Touchscreen Interface” on page Eng 5-2 for more information on the buttons on the
Touchscreen Display.
The Quick Navigation buttons display the menu in the lower display region.
Quick Navigation Buttons
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE
First Tab
• Home — The Home button displays the Main Menu 1-2 on the adjacent display region.
• UP One — The Up One button displays the menu up one level in the menu tree.
• Hold — The Hold button locks the adjacent display region to the current menu.
• Next — The Next button toggles between the first and second tab of Quick Navigation
Buttons.
Second Tab
• Install — The Install button displays the Installation Menus.
• Pers — The Pers button displays the Personality Menu.
• Scheme — The Color Scheme button displays the Color Scheme Menus. From these
menus, you can set the color of the buttons on the control panel, as well as the skin used
for the menus.
• Diags — The Diag button displays the Panel Diagnostics Menu.
• Help — The Help button displays the welcome screen for the Online Help. If you have
already accessed the online help, this button will display the help at the same page that it
was last viewed. If you hold the Help button, and press another button on the control
panel, you can view specific help information on that button, or group of buttons. Refer
to the section “Help Features” on page Eng 5-18 for more information on using the help.
Eng 5–10 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Aux Bus — The Aux Bus button displays the Aux Bus Outputs Menus.
• DVE — The DVE button displays the S&T MD Main Menu. From this menu you can
access any of the Squeeze & Tease Menus.
• CustCtrl — The Custom Control button displays the Custom Control ShotBox
Menus. From these menus you can run any custom control on the switcher.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–11
Menu Skins
The appearance of the menus, including colors and icons, can be customized by using one of the
skins provided with your Vision switcher.
1. Press HOME Setup Personality Color Scheme More More
Select Skin.
Eng 5–12 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Control Panel Mnemonics
The Vision control panel uses mnemonics (Figure 5.8) to indicate the sources or functions that
are assigned to buttons. For MLE crosspoint buses, and the custom control bus, the mnemonics
indicate the sources that are assigned to each button. For the Keyers, the mnemonics indicate
whether a key is on-air, and the current source that is selected for that key.
Crosspoint and custom control button mnemonics can be adjusted for color, font size, and
brightness, either globally, or on an individual basis.
PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
4
MLE RECALL MLE
1 CLIP 1
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK
MLE
4
7 8
SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
Note — The names that are shown on the mnemonics are those that are assigned to the
sources or the custom controls. Function names, such as Global-Store, cannot be changed.
Mnemonics can be adjusted in a number of ways to meet the needs of your environment. These
can be global adjustments, such as the contrast, brightness or the default appearance, or they can
be specific, allowing you to adjust each crosspoint and custom control mnemonic individually
when you name it.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–13
1. Press HOME Setup Personality Standard Mnemonics.
Note — If names have more than the maximum number of characters per line, the last
characters are dropped.
Note — If you are using an inverted font the color is applied to the text, otherwise it is applied
to the background.
Eng 5–14 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
4. Set the shifted crosspoint display mode for the mnemonics as follows:
Operating Tip — The lower label always shows the name of the input that is considered
active. Therefore, the name of the unshifted crosspoint is on the lower label until you press
down on the shift key; then the shifted crosspoint becomes the lower label.
• Use the Xpt Mode knob to select the display mode you want to use. You can select
between the following:
› 1 Name — Select this option to show only the names of the
crosspoints for the selected bus.
› 2 Names — Select this option to show the names of the
crosspoints for the selected bus and the names of crosspoints
when the bus is in Shift mode.
Note — The size of the font is overridden to Small or Small Invert to allow both names to be
shown. Names over 6 characters long drop the last characters to allow the name to fit.
› The example to the left shows the 2 Names feature with the
font set to invert.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–15
Control Panel Displays
The Vision control panel uses small displays (Figure 5.9) to provide you with information on the
current state of the switcher, or modules on the switcher. Control Panel Displays are located in
each MLE bus, Memory Module, and Positioner Module.
PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
4
MLE RECALL MLE
1 CLIP 1
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK
MLE
4
7 8
SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
The Control Panel Displays can be adjusted in a number of ways to meet the needs of your
environment. These adjustments include brightness, contrast, and overall appearance.
Eng 5–16 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Using the Naming Menus
The Naming Menus allow you to enter, or change, the name of video sources, custom control,
memories and various other elements on the switcher.
Operating Tip — If you want to use one of the preset names on the switcher, press Preset
Names to display Preset Names Menu. You can then use the knob to highlight the name you
want to use and press Select. The new name is shown in the New Name field.
2. Use the letters on the menu, or the keyboard, to enter the name into the New Name field.
3. Use the Font knob to select the font size you want to use. Along with size, you can also
select whether you want to name to be displayed as inverted, or reverse color.
4. Use the Color knob to select the color you want to use for the mnemonic.
Operating Tip — If you want the name on the mnemonic to start at a different position, use
the Next Mnem Start Pos and Prev Mnem Start Pos buttons to select how much of the name
is displayed.
5. Press Accept New Name to save the mnemonic settings for the name.
If you do not like the new name, you can change it back to the factory default by pressing
Default.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–17
Help Features
The Vision switcher provides a complete set of online manuals and a function-specific help
system that can be viewed on the Touchscreen Display. In addition to this, an extensive pop-up
system is provided to help you quickly and easily diagnose operational problems that may occur.
Online Manuals
A complete set of the Vision Manuals are provided on the switcher and can be viewed on the
Touchscreen Display.
1. Press Manuals on the Quick Navigation Bar on the Touchscreen Display. The online
manuals (Figure 5.10) are displayed in the Upper Display Region.
Operating Tip — To save a copy of the manuals in PDF format to a USB drive, insert a USB
drive into the USB port on the Vision control panel and press HOME More Help Copy
Manuals To USB.
Pop-up Help
The Pop-up Help feature is designed to alert you when an illegal function is attempted. When the
illegal button, or combination of buttons, is pressed, the Pop-up Help window is displayed. This
window provides a brief explanation of why the operation cannot be performed, and a reference
number that can be used when contacting Ross Technical support.
Eng 5–18 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Screen Captures
The Vision switcher allows you to take screen captures of the current state of the active menu.
Screen captures are stored to your removable USB flash drive.
1. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port on the Vision control panel.
2. Navigate to the menu you want to capture. The switcher will only capture the active, or
last used, menu.
3. Take a screen capture as follows:
• Press and hold the Store ALL button on the Global Memory Module.
• Press the FADE RATE button on the Global Memory Module.
4. The control panel beeps and the file is stored to the USB flash drive.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–19
Eng 5–20 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Software Upgrades and Options
In This Chapter
This chapter provides instructions for upgrading system software, as well as verifying and
installing various software options.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Vision Web Interface Account
• Software Upgrade
• System Information Overview
• Installed Options
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–1
Vision Web Interface Account
A software upgrade is performed using the QMD/X Web Interface. The QMD/X Web Interface
allows you to view the status of the boards, cards and modules installed on the switcher and
perform upgrades of the software and hardware packages. Since most of the boards are
hot-swappable, it is necessary to constantly monitor which boards, cards and modules are
installed, and make sure that their software and hardware versions are current and compatible
with the rest of the system. In order to use the QMD/X Web Interface, you will have to setup an
account to access the frame from the local sub-net.
The current versions of Internet Explorer, Mozilla, and Netscape are supported. If you have any
problems, contact Ross Video Technical Support.
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is
displayed.
2. Enter your username and password as follows when the Login Dialog Box appears. The
default Name is user and Password is password.
3. Click Other... Admin to display the Admin Page. This page allows you to change
the username and password for the frame.
Admin Page
4. Change the username and password for the QMD/X Web Interface account as follows:
Note — Usernames and Passwords can only contain numbers, letters, dashes, underscores
and periods; all other characters are invalid.
• Enter the new name for the account in the New Username field. This is the name
that is used when logging on.
• Enter the password for the new account in the New password field. This is the
password that is used when logging on.
• Re-enter the same password in the Confirm password field.
• Click Apply Changes to change the username and password. The next time you
access the QMD/X Web Interface, you must use this username and password.
Eng 6–2 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Software Upgrade
The software upgrade procedure allows you to upload a software upgrade package to the switcher
from an external computer that is on the same sub-network as the switcher. Once uploaded, the
switcher extracts the upgrade information and sends it to the boards, cards, and modules on the
switcher that require upgrading. Since most of the boards are hot-swappable, it is necessary to
constantly monitor which boards are plugged in, and make sure that their software and hardware
versions are current and compatible with the rest of the system.
Important — Because the software upgrade process automatically returns the switcher to
default values, it is important that you back up all switcher registers to the hard drive or USB
flash drive at this point. Refer to the section “Storing and Recalling Files and Setups” on page
Eng 13-4 for more information on storing your switcher Setups onto the hard drive or USB flash
drive.
Before you can perform the upgrade, you must perform a hard reboot of the switcher to ensure
that all components are in a known state. This reboot includes both the control panel and the
frame, and must be performed both before and after the upgrade.
Important — If you are upgrading to Vision from Synergy, you must upgrade to version
6.0MD or 6.1MD with Synergy before you can upgrade to version 7.1MD or higher with Vision.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–3
Note — After the Factory Default is performed, the Bus Maps and Output BNC settings have
been changed to the default settings. Ensure that you can find a source button that is assigned
to a valid input, and that you have a monitor connected to a default Aux Bus output of your
switcher. You will need to verify that the switcher is passing video properly after the upgrade.
To upgrade the switcher core, you must log into the QMD/X Web Interface and upload the new
software package.
Important — Ensure that the switcher is fully powered up before attempting the upgrade.
When the switcher is fully powered up it is able to pass video normally.
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is
displayed.
2. Enter your username and password as follows when the Login Dialog Box appears. The
default Name is user and Password is password.
Operating Tip — The System Information Page shows a list of all the upgradable
components on the boards, cards, and modules installed in the control panel and frame. Refer
to the section “System Information Overview” on page Eng 6-7 for more information on this
page.
3. Click Upgrade to display the Upgrade Page. The Upgrade Page lists all the previous
upgrade packages that were stored on the hard drive of the frame.
Eng 6–4 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Click Upgrade Selected Version. The upgrade package is uploaded to the
switcher and verified. The panel file is then requested.
• Click Browse. A file selection dialog box is displayed.
• Locate the Vision upgrade package file you want to upload to the switcher on your
computer. The file is named vision-<version>-<build>.tgz.
• Click Open/Choose to select the file. The file path and name will appear in the
Select File to Upload field. If the switcher is unable to verify that the file is an
upgrade package, an error message is displayed.
Note — The Check if there are additional Ross supplied files to upload after this one
should only be selected if you are advised to upload an additional file by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Click Add This File to add the selected file to the software upgrade package.
• Wait while the switcher installs the software version. This may take a few minutes.
• When the software version has been installed, the Additional Files Page is
displayed.
Note — If you receive a warning that the upgrade has failed because the flash is full (Rsync
failed, is flash full?), check the remaining Application Flash in the Storage Capacity section
of the System Info page. If the remaining capacity is less than 2M, you must delete a number of
FlexDevice drivers to free up space for the upgrade. You can re-install the FlexDevice drivers
after the upgrade. Once you have freed up the required space, try the upgrade again.
6. Click Reboot Now to perform a soft restart of the switcher. This cycles the logs on the
switcher and propagates the upgrade to all the boards, cards and modules on the
switcher.
Important — If a message asking you to Reboot the control panel appears on the menus of
the Touchscreen display, click Cancel. You will be rebooting the entire switcher in a later step.
7. Allow the switcher to propagate the upgrade to all the boards and cards installed in the
frame by waiting at least 20 minutes before proceeding to the next step.
8. Wait for the System Information Page to be displayed.
• Periodically reload/refresh the System Information Page until all the items listed have
Done as their Status.
• Verify that the switcher is passing video properly by selecting different crosspoints. This
ensures that the upgrade has completed. If the switcher is not passing video properly, check
the System Information Page again to ensure all items are done.
9. If the message “The software versions of the panel and frame do not match”
is shown, you need to upgrade your panel.
• Press HOME More System Shutdown Upgrade Panel.
10. If the message “PMCs need to be upgraded; please go to Panel Modules
menu” is shown, you need to upgrade your PMCs.
• Press HOME Setup More Panel Modules Upgrade PMCs.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–5
Rebooting the Switcher After an Upgrade
Rebooting the switcher after the upgrade ensures that all the boards, cards, and modules on the
switcher are properly upgraded and initialized. If a board, card or module was not properly
upgraded, the switcher attempts to upgrade and initialize it again with the reboot.
Caution — If the switcher has not finished propagating the upgrade before you proceed to
shut-down the switcher, you may damage the switcher.
1. Shut down the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-3 for information on shutting down the switcher.
2. Wait at least 6 seconds for the System Status Indicators to go out.
3. Power up the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Up the Switcher” on page Eng
4-2 for information on powering up the switcher.
4. Power on each Satellite Panel, in order, to upgrade it. Ensure that a Satellite Panel is upgraded
properly before powering on the next one.
Note — If the message “The software versions of the panel and frame do not match” is
shown, you need to upgrade your panel. Press HOME More System Shutdown
Upgrade Panel.
You have now completed the upgrade procedure and should now recall any Switcher Setups you
stored before the upgrade. Refer to the section “Storing and Recalling Files and Setups” on
page Eng 13-4 for more information on recalling Setups.
Eng 6–6 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
System Information Overview
The System Information Page of the QMD/X Web Interface provides an overview of all the
boards, cards, and modules in the frame and control panel of the switcher, as well as their current
status. An overview of the current storage capacity of the switcher is also provided.
Note — The information listed on this page is specific to your switcher and the boards, cards,
and modules you have installed, and may not appear as shown.
The System Information Page is divided into two regions, the System Information Region and
the Storage Capacity Region.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–7
• Version — This column specifies the current software version and build number that is
running on the component. If a component is running a different software version than
the other components on the switcher, this may indicate a problem with that component.
• Date — This column specifies the date of the software that is running on the component.
This is not the date that the software was upgraded, but the date that the software upgrade
was created by Ross Video. This date, along with the version number, helps a Ross Video
Technical Support person correctly identify the software you are running.
• Status — This column specifies the status of the component upgrade. The possible
status for a component is as follows:
› Pending — The component requires upgrading and is in the queue to be upgraded.
› In Progress — The component is being upgraded.
› No Status — The component has not reported a status. The component could be
rebooting, or there is a failure. If this message remains on for an extended period of
time, contact Ross Video Technical Support.
› Failed — The component is reporting a failure to upgrade. Contact Ross Video
Technical Support.
› Done — The component has been upgraded successfully.
Note — If the message Hard disk log contains errors! is displayed, contact Ross Video
Technical Support for information on diagnosing this warning.
Eng 6–8 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Installed Options
Several menus are available that allow you to verify all of the standard and optional boards and
software present in your Vision switcher. The menus also display the serial number, allow you to
install additional software options, and store and recall option codes.
Note — You cannot view, install, or manage software options from a Satellite Panel. Only the
Master Panel has the Installed Options Menu 2-2, and the Software Options, Enter Serial
Number, and Add Options buttons.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–9
1. Press HOME Setup Installed Options Panel Boards.
Eng 6–10 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Installing Serial Numbers
If the label “0000000” appears at the top of the Installed Options Menus, a serial number is
required.
1. Press HOME Setup Installed Options Enter Serial Number.
Note — The Encrypt Code is a random number that is generated each time the switcher is
powered up. The purpose of the Encrypt Code is to prevent unauthorized installation of software
options. The code remains valid until the switcher is powered down or reset. The next time the
switcher is powered up, a new Encrypt Code is generated.
2. Call Ross Video Technical Support at the number listed on the menu.
3. Call Ross Video Technical Support to obtain a serial number for your switcher. Have the
following information ready when you contact Ross Video Technical Support:
• Your Name.
• The Name of the Facility that the switcher is installed in.
• The Ross Encrypt Code that is listed on the menu.
4. You are given a numeric code by the Technical Support representative.
5. Enter the code using the keypad in the Global Memory Module.
6. Press ENTER on the keypad, or press Finished on the Enter Serial Number Menu.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–11
1. Press HOME Setup Installed Options Software Options.
Eng 6–12 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Proc Amps — This option allows you to control Processing Amplifiers for every
input on the switcher.
• RGB Color Corrector — This option allows you to control a floating input-based
color corrector.
• Robotic System — This option allows you to control a robotic camera from the
Vision switcher.
• Router — This option allows you to control a router from the Vision switcher.
• SD DVE Option — This option allows you to use Squeeze & Tease MD with
standard definition video formats.
• Serial Tally — This option allows you to control a device using the serial tally
protocol from the Vision switcher.
• Small Audio Mixer — This option allows you to control a small audio mixer from
the Vision switcher.
• SmartConversion — This option allows you to create a conversion loop with an
external Up/Down converter and have the Vision switcher automatically route the
video to the converter and back. Refer to the section “SmartConversion and
Up/Down Converters” on page Eng 16-1 for information on how to set up a
conversion loop.
• Still Store (Aprisa) — This option allows you to control an external Still Store
from the Vision switcher.
• Video Server Control — This option allows you to control a video server from the
Vision switcher.
• VTR Remote Control — This option allows you to control a VTR from the Vision
switcher.
3. Press Add Option to display the Enter Option Number Menu.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–13
Operating Tip — Store your serial number and option codes in a safe place for future
reference.
6. Enter the option code using the keypad in the Global Memory Module.
Important — You must enter all 5 characters, including any leading zeros. Failure to do so
may prevent the option from being installed properly.
7. Press ENTER on the keypad, or press Finished on the Enter Serial Number Menu.
The Installed Options Menu now indicates the options you have just installed.
Note — Only the Master Panel can store and recall option codes to either the hard drive or
USB flash drive.
Important — The Delete Selected SW Option and Delete All SW Options commands allow
you to delete selected, or all, installed software options. Do not attempt to delete your options
unless instructed to by Ross Video Technical Support. Ensure that you have stored your option
codes before attempting to delete the options.
Eng 6–14 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Recalling Option Codes
1. Press HOME Setup Installed Options More.
2. Press Recall Option Codes to recall all of your option codes.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–15
Eng 6–16 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Input Source Configuration and
Check
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on configuring and checking the video signals on the input
sources of the switcher.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Naming Input Sources
• Source Configuration Menu Overview
• Assigning Input Source Types
• Assigning Alphas
• Configuring Auto Keys
• Non-Sync Detection
• Assigning Audio Channels to Input Sources
• Creating Bus Maps
• Assigning Panel Bus Maps
• Assigning Tallies to Input Sources
• Assigning GPI Outputs to Input Sources
• Checking Keys
Operating Tip — A Video Input Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which inputs have been connected to the BNCs. Refer to the section “Video Input Worksheet”
on page Eng 21-2 for a copy of this worksheet.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–1
Naming Input Sources
Each video input source to the switcher can be given a specific name that is displayed on the
mnemonic for that source. The mnemonics can be further customized for color and font size on an
individual basis.
You can assign a source to a UMD Input address to provide the mnemonic names. If an input
source is assigned to a UMD Input address, any input source name you enter is replaced with the
UMD Input name for all the mnemonics and menus.
Note — If you do not have the mnemonics option installed, or want to use button insert, refer to
the section “Button Inserts” on page Eng 3-17 for more information on installing button inserts.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Source Names Menu to enter a name, or set up the mnemonics
for the crosspoint button.
2. Use the Source knob to select the input source you want to name. The default input
source numbers correspond to physical BNCs on the rear of the frame.
3. Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field.
4. Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the source.
5. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Eng 7–2 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Source Configuration Menu Overview
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–3
Assigning Input Source Types
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Source Config Input Type.
Important — All input sources must be assigned to Video or Alpha unless the device
connected to that input source is controlled by the switcher.
• Off — Select this option to turn the input source off. Selecting Off removes the
input source from other menus.
• DVE — Select this option when a DVE Video (fill) signal is assigned to the selected
input source. You must have the DVE Send and Remote Control Software
Option in order to control the DVE you are assigning to the selected input source.
Contact your Ross Video Representative for more information on purchasing this
option.
• VTR — Select this option when a VTR or Video Server, or Audio Server is
connected to the selected input source. You must have the VTR Remote Control
Software Option in order to control the VTR you are assigning to the selected input
source. You may also need the additional Video Server Control Software Option
or Audio Server Control Software, depending on the device you are connecting.
Contact your Ross Video representative for information on purchasing these
options.
• Alpha — Select this option when an alpha, or key, signal is connected to the
selected input source. Devices such as Character Generators, Graphics (Paint)
Systems, and Still Stores typically provide unique alpha signals.
• Router — Select this option when a routing switcher output is connected to the
selected input source. You must have the Routing Switcher Interface Software
Option in order to control the Router you are assigning to the selected input source.
Contact your Ross Video representative for information on purchasing this option.
• Still Store — Select this option when an external Still-Store is connected to the
selected input source. You must have the External Still Store Software Option in
order to control the external Still-Store you are assigning to the selected input
Eng 7–4 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
source. Contact your Ross Video representative for information on purchasing this
option.
• Robotic Camera — Select this option when a robotic camera controller is
connected to the selected input source. You must have the Robotic Camera System
Interface Software Option in order to control the Robotic Camera you are
assigning to the selected input source. Contact your Ross Video representative for
information on purchasing this option.
• Char Gen — Select this option when a Character Generator is connected to the
selected input source. You must have the Character Generator Interface
Software Option installed in order to control the Character Generator you are
assigning to the selected input source. Contact your Ross Video representative for
information on purchasing this option.
• Video — This is the default option. Use this option unless the input is an alpha, or a
device listed above.
5. Use the Video Format knob to select the format of the input video of the selected input
source.
Note — Assigning a Video Format to an Input that is different than the native video format
that the switcher is operating in, can only be used for passing non-native video formats out an
Aux Bus unless you have SmartConversion installed. Refer to the section “Setting Up a
Conversion Loop” on page Eng 16-2 for information on SmartConversion.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–5
Assigning Alphas
The Alpha, or Key, video signal is the component of an Auto Key, or Auto Select Key, that cuts
the hole in the background video signal for the Video, or fill, component. This section discusses
how to assign a video input as an alpha.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Source Config Input Type.
2. Use the Input knob to select the input source you want to assign as a Key Alpha.
3. In the Input Type area, select Alpha.
Operating Tip — When you select Alpha as the Type, the Auto Key item in the Status Box
changes to Alpha, indicating whether the new alpha is Shaped or Unshaped.
4. Use the Video Format knob to select the format of the input video of the selected input
source.
Note — Assigning a Video Format to an Input that is different than the native video format
that the switcher is operating in, can only be used for passing non-native video formats out an
Aux Bus unless the SmartConversion™ option is used. Refer to the section
“SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters” on page Eng 16-1 for more information.
5. Press Alpha.
Note — Select Unshaped if you are unsure about which mode to use. Unshaped allows the
switcher to match the alpha and fill signals that the source device (such as a CG or still-store) is
generating. Refer to the Operation Manual of your device for details on its specific fill and alpha
output signals.
Eng 7–6 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
› Shaped — Select this option to have the switcher perform an additive key.
With Shaped Keys, the Key Alpha cuts a hole based on the monochrome value
of the alpha. Shades of gray are translated into either white or black, giving the
key a hard edge. Shaped Key alphas are sometimes used with Character
Generators to cut very precise holes for the fill.
7. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–7
Configuring Auto Keys
Auto Keys allow you to associate the Alpha (key) and Video (fill) signals of an Auto Select Key
so that the key is automatically configured when you select the crosspoint. This association
simplifies the keying process on the switcher for outputs from Character Generators or External
Still Stores, that generate separate Key and Video signals. When you select a key input source on
the crosspoint buses, the alpha and fill are automatically selected.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Source Config Auto Key Setup.
Operating Tip — You can associate one Global-Store, or MLE-Store, channel as the alpha
for another Global-Store, or MLE-Store, channel. This means that if you load a still that has
alpha information in the file, the switcher uses the associated channel to load the alpha still.
Only Global-Store and Global-Store, or MLE-Store and MLE-Store, channels can be used in the
auto-key.
2. Use the Source knob to select the input source that you want to use as the Fill for the
Auto Key. You can choose between the following:
Operating Tip — If you are setting up an MLE re-entry for MLE Layer Mode, select the MLE
as the Source (for key fill), and the MLE Clean Feed as the Alpha (for key alpha). When you
re-enter this MLE into a keyer on another MLE, the MLE and Clean Feed are used as the key
video/alpha pair for an auto select key.
• MLE X — Select this option to select the program output of an MLE as the fill,
where “X” represents the number of the MLE.
• STIL X — Select this option to select the output of a Global-Store channel as the
fill, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLE ST X — Select this option to select the output of an MLE-Store channel as the
fill, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLEXCLNY — Select this option to assign CleanFeed 1 or 2 from an MLE as the
fill, where “X” represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” the number of the Clean
Feed. This is commonly used when the Clean Feed output is set to Layer mode, or
to provide an MLE-Store on a Clean Feed output.
• BNC — Select this option to select a video source as the fill.
3. Use the Alpha knob to select the input source that you want to use as the Key Alpha for
the Auto Key. You can choose between the following:
• BLACK — Select this option for video sources with no associated alpha. This is the
default setting.
Eng 7–8 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• STIL X — Select this option to assign Global-Store channel to the video source as
the alpha, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLE ST X — Select this option to assign MLE-Store channel to the video source
as the alpha, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLEXCLNY — Select this option to assign CleanFeed 1 or 2 from an MLE to the
input source as the alpha, where “X” represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” the
number of the Clean Feed. This is commonly used when the Clean Feed output is
set to Layer mode.
• BNC — Select this option to assign an input source as the alpha.
4. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
Note — The change is not applied until the key is un-selected and re-selected, or the key type
is changed.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–9
Non-Sync Detection
The Non-Sync Detect feature allows you to disable the detection and reporting of
non-synchronized video signals. Non-synchronised video signals are either not properly timed, or
use a different reference format than the one the switcher is operating in.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Source Config More More N/S
Detect.
Note — The N/S Control selection is applied across all physical BNCs. Selecting All On or All
Off for any physical BNC is applied to all physical BNCs.
• Individual — Select this option to turn the Non-Sync Detection feature On or Off
for individual physical BNCs.
• All On — Select this option to have all non-synchronized video signals detected.
• All Off — Select this option to not have any non-synchronized video signals
detected.
3. Turn the Non-Sync Detection feature On and Off for individual physical BNCs as
follows:
• Use the N/S Control knob to select Individual.
• Use the Physical BNC knob to select the physical BNC that you want to set the
Non-Sync Detection feature for.
• Use the N/S Detect knob to toggle this feature On or Off.
› OFF — Select this option to not have non-synchronized video signals
detected for the selected physical BNC.
› ON — Select this option to have non-synchronized video signals detected for
the selected physical BNC. If a non-synchronized video signal is selected on
the crosspoint bus, the crosspoint button flashes, indicating that the video
signal is mis-timed.
4. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
Eng 7–10 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–11
Assigning Audio Channels to Input Sources
Audio channels are assigned to input sources to follow the video signal on and off-air during
transitions. This Audio-Follow-Video (AFV) process is the normal interaction of an Audio Mixer
and the Vision switcher. You can alter this normal AFV operation at any time by applying an
Audio Override.
You can assign up to 2 audio sources to each input source. Each audio source can be a channel, or
a group of channels.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Source Config Audio.
Note — The total number of audio channels that you have available to assign to the input
sources depends on the Audio Mixer Interface option you have, and the number of audio
channels your Audio Mixer supports.
• Use the Input knob to select the input source that you want to assign an audio
channel to for audio follow video operation. When this input source it taken on-air,
the Audio Mixer will bring up the selected audio channels.
Note — If you have programmed Audio Assign Custom Controls, the Audio Channel knobs
on the Audio Menu will display the custom control that you assigned the channel to.
• Use the Audio 1 knob to select an audio channel, or group, that you want to assign
to the selected input source.
• Use the Audio 2 knob to select another audio channel, or group, that you want to
assign to the selected input source.
3. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Your configured Audio Mixer channels will now follow crosspoint transitions for normal AFV
operation.
Eng 7–12 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Creating Bus Maps
The Vision switcher allows you to map any input source to any crosspoint button on the control
panel using a Bus Map. There are 16 editable Bus Maps available, and a single fixed, default,
Bus Map, all of which can be applied to all, or select MLEs as either the primary Bus Map, or as
a shifted set of input sources for a bus.
In a MultiPanel configuration, all control panels share the same Bus Maps, but which Bus Maps
are assigned to each MLE is specific to the panel. For example, on Satellite Panel 1 you can
assign Bus Map 5 to MLE 3. On Satellite Panel 4 you can also assign Bus Map 1 to MLE 3, as
long as both panels have MLE 3 assigned to them.
Each editable Bus Map must be assigned input sources for each crosspoint button on the bus, and
then assigned to the MLE, or bus, that you want to use it on.
Operating Tip — Use the Bus Map Worksheet to help identify the input source that you
want to assign to the crosspoint buttons for each Bus Map. Refer to the section “Bus Map
Worksheet” on page Eng 21-6 for a copy of this worksheet.
Operating Tip — Unless the Bus Map you are editing is assigned to a panel row on the
switcher, you will not see the changes you are making.
Operating Tip — You can edit a bus map for a control panel of a different size than the
current one by pressing Select Panel Type and selecting the size of panel. Press Accept to
return to the Edit Bus Maps Menu.
2. Use the Map knob to select the Bus Map you want to edit. The default Bus Map cannot
be edited.
3. Select the button on the shift level that you want to assign a input source to. Use the
middle knob to scroll the list. The button lights on the program bus of all panel rows.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–13
Operating Tip — Press Insert to insert a input source at the selected button and shift the
remaining input sources to the right. Press Delete to remove an input source at the selected
button and shift the remaining input sources to the left. Press Clear to remove the input source
from the selected button and not shift the remaining input sources. None is selected for the
cleared buttons and the last button when an input source is removed using the Delete.
4. Use the Source knob to select the input source that you want to assign to the selected
crosspoint button. You can choose between the following:
Note — Input sources that are assigned to OFF do not appear in the list. If you want to assign
these sources to a crosspoint button, you must assign them to a type.
• NONE — Select this option to assign no input source to the selected crosspoint
button. When pressed, the button lights, but does not stay lit.
• BKGD 1 — Select this option to assign Color Background 1 to the selected
crosspoint button. When selected on the crosspoint bus, the Mattes Selection Menu
for Background Generator 1 is displayed.
• BKGD 2 — Select this option to assign Color Background 2 to the selected
crosspoint button. When selected on the crosspoint bus, the Mattes Selection Menu
for Background Generator 2 is displayed.
• BLCK — Select this option to assign Black to the selected crosspoint button.
Important — You cannot select a crosspoint button assigned to MLE # on that MLE. For
example, you cannot select a crosspoint button assigned to MLE 2 on MLE 2, as this causes a
feedback loop.
• MLE X — Select this option to assign the Program output of an MLE to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MLE. This allows you to
re-enter an MLE into another MLE.
Operating Tip — By default, the MLE re-entry buttons are already mapped to crosspoint
buttons. Refer to the section “Default Input Mapping” on page Eng 3-13 for more information
on which button the MLE re-entries are default mapped to.
• SHFT X — Select this option to assign the “Shift” function to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” refers to the shift level. You must assign a shift button
for each level to the No Shift row to be able to access that shift level. Refer to the
section “Shifted Crosspoint Buttons” on page Eng 7-16 for more information on
using the SHIFT button.
• STIL X — Select this option to assign a Global-Store channel to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLE-ST X — Select this option to assign an MLE-Store channel to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLEXCLN Y — Select this option to assign a Clean Feed output from an MLE to
the selected crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MLE and
“X” represents the number of the Clean Feed.
Important — On an x.5 MLE switcher, the MLE Clean Feed is not supported. Only the
dedicated Output BNCs for the Mix/DSK option can provide a dedicated Clean Feed for the
bottom, Program/Preset, MLE.
Eng 7–14 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• MLE X PVW — Select this option to assign the Preview output from an MLE to
the selected crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MLE.
• PVW OVL — Select this option to assign the main Preview output with Overlay to
the selected crosspoint button.
Important — Selecting the Preview with Overlay on the Preset Bus of the bottom MLE
causes a feedback loop. This feedback loop does not apply if you have the Mix/DSK or
MultiDSK option installed.
• Key Cut — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Cut to the selected crosspoint
button. The Key Cut allows you to perform a cut of the AuxKey keyer on the
selected Aux Bus.
• KeyTrans — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Transition to the selected
crosspoint button. The Key Trans allows you to perform a transition of the AuxKey
keyer on the selected Aux Bus. Refer to the section “AuxKey Setup” on page Ops
7-28 for information on setting the AuxKey transition rate.
• BKGDCUT — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background Cut to the
selected crosspoint button. The BKGDCUT allows you to perform a cut of the
AuxKey background on the selected Aux Bus.
• BKGDTRNS — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background Transition to
the selected crosspoint button. The BKGDTRANS allows you to perform a
transition of the AuxKey background on the selected Aux Bus. Refer to the section
“AuxKey Setup” on page Ops 7-28 for information on setting the AuxKey
transition rate.
• K+B CUT — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background and Key Cut to
the selected crosspoint button. The K+B CUT allows you to perform a cut of the
AuxKey background and keyer on the selected Aux Bus.
• K+B TRNS — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background and Key
Transition to the selected crosspoint button. The K+B TRNS allows you to perform
a transition of the AuxKey background and keyer on the selected Aux Bus. Refer to
the section “AuxKey Setup” on page Ops 7-28 for information on setting the
AuxKey transition rate.
• Bus Hold — Select this option to assign a Bus Hold to the selected crosspoint
button. The Bus Hold allows you to have the currently selected source, on the bus
that you select the Bus Hold for, not change when a memory recall is performed.
This is the same as holding the crosspoint button when performing a memory recall.
On an Aux Bus, the Bus Hold toggles the Aux Bus Lock on and off.
• MVX — Select this option to assign the output of a MultiViewer to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MultiViewer.
• In XXX — Select the desired input source to assign it to the selected crosspoint
button, where “XXX” represents the input designation.
5. Select and assign each of your external inputs. Remember that inputs assigned as Off on
the Source Configuration Menu are filtered from this list.
Operating Tip — You can use the Assign Maps button on the Edit Bus Maps Menu to
navigate to the Assign Bus Maps Menu directly. A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you
to confirm your changes.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–15
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Note — If Shift Lock is active on an MLE, the mnemonics for that MLE switch to a two-line
format.
Eng 7–16 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
1. Press HOME Setup More Bus Maps Copy Map.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–17
› Press Cancel to not accept the changes. The switcher returns to the previously
stored settings.
Eng 7–18 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Assigning Panel Bus Maps
Bus Maps can be assigned to the program/preset, key, or utility buses of each MLE, or to each
Aux Bus. Bus Maps can be assigned to individual buses, MLEs, Aux Buses, or to the entire panel.
Bus Map assignment are control panel specific and do not affect the Bus Map assignments on
other control panels.
Bus Map assignments are stored in the switcher personality register.
Important — The OverDrive® Production Control System requires that all buses on your
switcher are assigned to the same bus map. OverDrive does not support different bus maps on
different buses.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–19
• RmtAuxPnl PX — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Remote Aux
Panel(s) connected to the Peripheral Port X, where “X” is the number of the
Peripheral Port.
• Extern Row X — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Auxiliary Control
Panel assigned to the External Row X, where “X” is the number of the External
row that the Auxiliary Control Panel is assigned to.
3. Use the Map knob to select the bus map that you want to assign to the selected bus.
4. Press Perform Assign to assign the selected bus map to the bus.
Operating Tip — If all the buses on your control panel are not assigned to the same bus
map, the Map knob on the Assign Panel Bus Map Menu will initially be set to Different.
Eng 7–20 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Naming Bus Maps
Each Bus Map can be given a specific name that is displayed on the menus when working with
bus maps.
1. Press HOME Setup More Bus Maps.
2. Use the Map knob to select the Bus Map you want to change the name for.
3. Press Rename Map.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Rename Map Menu to enter a name, or set up the mnemonics
for the crosspoint button.
4. Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field.
Operating Tip — You should consult your Bus Map Worksheet and use that as a guide for
configuring the Input BNCs. Refer to the section “Bus Map Worksheet” on page Eng 21-6 for a
copy of this worksheet.
5. Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the Bus Map.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–21
Assigning Tallies to Input Sources
Each Vision control panel includes at least 36 configurable tally relays, each of which can be
assigned to any input source. The Extended Tallies options, if available, provide an additional 36
tallies (allowing for a total of 144 on a Vision 4).
Input sources are assigned to tallies so that only one input source can be assigned to a tally, but
the same input source can be assigned to multiple tallies.
In a MultiPanel configuration, if you want the Program MLE of a panel to tally, and it is not the
highest numbered MLE, then you must set that MLE to tally on that panel. Tallies are control
panel specific.
Operating Tip — Use the Tally Number column in the Video Input Worksheet to help
identify the tally connections that need to be made. Refer to the section “Video Input
Worksheet” on page Eng 21-2 for a copy of this worksheet.
Note — You can only assign a tally relay to one input, but can assign multiple tallies to the
same input source.
Operating Tip — For wiring convenience, it is recommended that you make your tally
associations on a 1:1 basis (i.e. Input C11 assigned to Tally 11).
• Use the Mode knob to select the type of tally to assign to the input source. You can
choose between the following:
› On Air — Select this option to have the selected input source tally when it is
on-air.
Eng 7–22 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
› Preview — Select this option to have the selected input source tally when it is
on preview (part of the next transition). Whether the input source is on
preview depends on how the Preview Bus Module is set.
› AuxNme(#:#) — Select the Aux Bus 1:1 through 4:8 that you want to tally
when the selected input source is selected on that Aux Bus.
4. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–23
Assigning GPI Outputs to Input Sources
Each GPI Output on the switcher can be assigned to an input source with a preroll time. When
Roll Clip is active on the Transition Module, and an input source with an assigned GPI Output is
taken on-air, the GPI output is triggered immediately, but the transition is delayed for the Preroll
time.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Source Config More More
GPIOs.
Note — You can only assign one GPI output to an input source at a time, but you can assign
multiple input sources to the same GPI output.
3. Use the GPI Outputs knob to select the GPI output that you want to assign to the
selected input source.
4. Use the Preroll knob to select the amount of time between the GPI Output trigger, and
the transition, when the Roll Clip button is active in the Transition Module.
5. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Eng 7–24 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Checking Keys
After you have set up your Auto Keys you should test them to ensure that they display properly.
This allows you to verify that each alpha-fill combination is working correctly, and generating a
proper Linear Key.
1. Select an input source on the Background (BKGD) Bus of the highest number MLE.
This is the background that you place the Auto Select key over.
2. Press the Key 1 select (SEL) button to assign the Keyers Module and Key Bus to
Key 1 (Figure 7.1).
Operating Tip — If you are unfamiliar with how to use the Keyers, refer to the section
“Keyers Module” on page Ops 7-2.
KEYERS
AUTO SELF MATTE KEY BORD BORD SHOW
SELECT KEY FILL MEM ON OFF ALPHA
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
3. Press the Auto Select button on the Keyers Module to display the key as an Auto
Select Key.
4. Select an Auto Key input source on the Key Bus of the MLE. This is the Key that you
placed over the Background.
Operating Tip — If you select a crosspoint button that is set up to control an external device,
the device control menu for that device is displayed. Press the crosspoint button again to
display the Auto Key Setup Menu.
5. Select the Key 1 button in the MLE Transition Module of the bottom MLE. This
includes the keyer in the next transition. The key appears on the Preview monitor and
the Auto Key Setup Menu is displayed.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–25
6. Visually check the appearance of the Auto Key on the preview monitor. Check for the
following:
• The assigned Alpha input signal should be properly cutting the hole in the
background.
• The selected Video (fill) input signal should be properly filling the hole.
• The edges of the key should be clean.
7. If the Auto Key does not display correctly, ensure that the proper MLE and Key is being
shown, and that the proper Video (fill) and Alpha are selected. Check for the following:
• The correct MLE and Keyer are shown. If the incorrect MLE or Key is shown,
ensure that you have selected Key 1 on the bottom PGM/PST MLE.
• The correct Key Video (fill) source name and Input BNC are shown. If the Key
Video is incorrect, ensure that the desired source has been selected, or that it has
been properly assigned to the crosspoint button.
• The correct Key Alpha source name and Input BNC are shown. If the Key Alpha
is incorrect, ensure that the Auto Key has been properly set up.
• The correct Key Attributes are shown. If the Key Attributes are incorrect, ensure
that the Auto Key has been properly set up for Shaped or Unshaped, Clip, Gain, and
Transparency.
8. If the Auto Key has the correct input sources, but still does not display correctly, ensure
that the key is properly set up for Shaped or Unshaped. Check for the following:
• If the Auto Key has been set up for Unshaped, but the alpha signal is actually
Shaped, you will see black edges around the key.
• If the Auto Key has been set up for Shaped, but the alpha signal is actually
Unshaped, you will see jagged edges and no gradation.
9. If the Auto Key is set up properly, but the edges or shadows of the key, do not display
properly, adjust the Clip and Gain. Adjust the Clip and Gain as follows:
• Select the SEL button for Key 1. This ensures that the Key Attribute buttons are
assigned to Key 1.
• Toggle the KEY MEM button in the Keyer Module to Off (not lit) to allow you to
override the Clip and Gain settings of the Auto Key.
Eng 7–26 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
For More Information...
• on connecting video inputs, refer to the section “Video Input Cabling” on page Eng
3-13.
• on checking video inputs, refer to the section “Input Verification” on page Eng 4-16.
• on keying, refer to the section “Keying” on page Ops 7-1.
• on checking the Non-Sync status of an input selected on a bus, refer to the section
“Non-Sync Status” on page Eng 17-16.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–27
Eng 7–28 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Video Output Configuration and
Check
In This Chapter
This chapter provides instructions for configuring and checking the video signals on the Output
BNCs of the Vision switcher. As you follow each procedure, you are, in effect, building a
database that is used by the switcher to provide the desired names, sources, key and fill
associations, and overall switcher functionality.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Configuring Video Outputs
• Checking Video Outputs
• Clean Feed
• Fade to Black
• MLE Tally
• Ancillary Data
• Switch on Field
• MultiViewer
• Mix/DSK
• MultiDSK
• Mix/DSK and MultiDSK
• AuxKeys
Operating Tip — A Video Output Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which outputs have been assigned to the BNCs. Refer to the section “Video Output
Worksheet” on page Eng 21-9 for a copy of this worksheet.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–1
Configuring Video Outputs
The frame has a number of output BNCs that can be set up as either MLE Program, MLE
Preview, MLE Clean Feed, Preview with Overlay, an Aux output or an AuxKey. The
configuration of your facility will depend largely on how many Video Output Boards are
installed, and which options have been purchased.
The number of Output BNC your switcher has depends on the number of Video Output Boards
you have installed in the frame.
This section describes how to assign Output BNCs to the output signals of the switcher, such as
MLE Program.
Please note the following when configuring video outputs:
• If you have the Mix/DSK, MultiDSK™ or AuxKeys™ options installed, certain Output
BNCs are locked to specific outputs. In some cases, only these Output BNCs can be used
for the output of this option.
• If you are setting up the Program output for a control panel that does not have the highest
number MLE assigned to it, you must use the MLE X PGM.
• The number of Clean Feed outputs for an MLE (MLE X ClnFd), or the main Clean Feed
outputs (Clean Feed), depends on the Key 4 Mode that the MLE is set to. For the main
Clean Feed output, it depends on the Key 4 Mode settings for the PGM/PST MLE.
• If you are using Aux Buses to pass non-native video format signals through the switcher,
Output BNC C03 and C04 on the QMD/MD frames cannot be used. Output BNC C03
and C04 cannot pass video that is of a format other than what the switcher is operating in.
Eng 8–2 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
This completes the procedure for setting your Output BNC types.
Table 8.1 Video Sources
Source Group Source Source Description
Select this option to have the main Program output, the output of the
highest number MLE, routed to the selected Output BNC. The Program
Program
MLE with the MultiDSK, Half MLE, and Preview Overlay options is
the highest number MLE assigned to a control panel in the system.
Select this option to have the main Preview output, the preview of the
System Outputs Preview
highest number MLE, routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the main Preview output with Preview
PRV w/ OVL
Overlay output routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the main Preview output without Preview
PRV w/o OVL
Overlay output routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the Program output of the selected MLE
MLE X PGM routed to the selected Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE you
are selecting.
Select this option to have the Preview output of the selected MLE
MLE X PRV
routed to the selected Output BNC.
MLE Outputs
Select this option to have the Look Ahead Preview output of the
MLE X LkAhd
selected MLE routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the Clean Feed 1 or Clean Feed 2 output of
MLE X ClnFd1(2) the selected MLE routed to the selected Output BNC where “X”
represents the MLE you are selecting.
Select this option to have the main Clean Feed 1 or Clean Feed 2
Clean Feeds Clean Feed 1(2)
output routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the output of a MultiViewer routed to the
MultiViewers MVXY selected Output BNC, where “X” is the number of the MultiViewer, and
“Y” is the head on that MultiViewer.
Select this option to assign the output of the selected Global-Store to the
Global Stores GlobalStore X selected Output BNC, where “X” represents the Global-Store channel
you are selecting.
Select this option to have the Program output of the active Aux Bus
routed to the selected Output BNC. When you assign an Aux Bus to a
Aux Monitor Aux Monitor Crosspoint Group, or panel row, the output of that Aux Bus is routed to
the Aux Monitor output. This does not apply to the Aux Bus selected by
an Auxiliary Control Panel.
Select this option to have the source selected on the Aux Bus routed to
Aux Bus
Aux Bus Follows the Output BNC. You can select between Bank1, Aux1 through Bank6,
Outputs 1:1 - 6:8
Aux8.
Select this option to have an input source routed directly to an Output
Inputs In XXX
BNC, where “X” is the number of the Input BNC.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–3
Table 8.1 Video Sources
Source Group Source Source Description
Select this option to have the source selected on the Program Bus of
MLE X PGM
the MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE.
Select this option to have the source selected on the Preview Bus of the
MLE X PST
MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE.
Select this option to have the video of the source selected on the Key
MLE X KEYY Bus of the MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the
MLE Bus Follows
MLE and “Y” the Key.
Select this option to have the alpha of the source selected on the Key
MLE X
Bus of the MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the
KEYYAlpha
MLE and “Y” the Key.
Select this option to have the source selected on the Utility Bus of the
MLE X Util1(2)
MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE.
Select this option to have the video of the source selected on the
MultiDSKYV MultiDSK Key routed to the Output BNC, where “Y” represents the
Keyer.
MultiDSK Follows
Select this option to have the alpha of the source selected on the
MultiDSKYA MultiDSK Key routed to the Output BNC, where “Y” represents the
Keyer.
These items are fixed to the outputs of the AuxKey assigned to the
Aux Mix Output (fixed)
selected Output BNCs.
These items are fixed to the outputs of the Mix/DSK and/or
MixMulti Outputs (fixed)
MultiDSKs.
Eng 8–4 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Checking Video Outputs
Nearly every Output BNC of the Vision switcher can be assigned to any output source, allowing
you to assign multiple outputs to a single output signal. After the cable connections to the Output
BNCs are completed, and the output signals are assigned to the BNCs, you can check that the
proper output signal is being fed out of each Output BNC.
To confirm which output signal is being sent to which Output BNC, use the Aux Bus Outputs
Menu 2-2 in conjunction with the Output BNC Verification table (Table 8.2).
Operating Tip — The Aux Bus Outputs Menu 1-2 lists the selected outputs for all the Aux
Buses on the switcher.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–5
Table 8.2 Output BNC Verification
To Verify This Output Do This...
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PGM Bus of MLE 1. Repeat for each MLE
MLE PGM
installed on your switcher.
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PV Bus of MLE 1. Repeat for each MLE
MLE PV
installed on your switcher.
Put all Keys on-air with a different source and select each of the Clean Feed positions in
MLE Clean Feed turn. As you go from Before Keys to Between Keys X&Y, you will see the keys appear
on-air. Repeat for each MLE installed on your switcher.
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PGM Bus of MLE 1. Re-enter MLE 1 onto the
MLE LkAhd PGM/PST MLE. Select different crosspoints buttons on the PV Bus of MLE 1. Repeat
for each MLE installed on your switcher.
Connect an monitor to the Output BNC that the MultiViewer is assigned to and load a
MVa layout into the MultiViewer. Refer to the section “MultiViewer” on page Eng 8-14 for
more information on setting up a MultiViewer.
BankX, AuxY (X:Y)b Use the MLE SEL Button Menu to assign the Key Bus of an MLE to Bank X, Aux Y.
a. The MultiViewer option must be installed in order to be able to test this output.
b. Where X represents the number of the Bank, and Y the number of the Aux Bus you want to check.
Eng 8–6 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Clean Feed
The FlexiClean™ feature allows you to create a secondary program output that is taken from a
different location in the video layering for the selected MLE. The Clean Feed for each MLE can
be configured to take the video signal before any of the keys (Figure 8.1). This does not include
the specific Clean Feed outputs provided by the MultiDSK™ or Mix/DSK options.
Important — If you have a 4-Keyer MLE, the Clean Feeds that are available to that MLE
depend on the Key 4 Mode that you have set up. Always check your Key 4 Mode before using
the Clean Feed output in your production. If the active Key 4 Mode does not support one or both
Clean Feeds, alternate video will be fed out of the Clean Feed output BNCs.
Program
BKGD Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4
Out
Figure 8.1 Clean Feed can be taken from before or between the keys (4-Keyer Shown)
Note — If you set up a Clean Feed for the Program/Preset MLE with MultiDSK or Mix/DSK
active, only the before Key 1 output is shown, even if before Key 2 is selected.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–7
Operating Tip — If you set up an Auto Select key with an MLE program and the Clean Feed
in Layer mode for that MLE, you can re-enter an MLE as an Auto Select key on another MLE.
You must have all the keyers selected as part of the next transition on the MLE that the keys are
set up on.
• MLEStore 1-4 — Select this option to have an MLE-Store used as the video
source for the Clean Feed. This allows you to select the output of an MLE-Store
from one MLE on another MLE.
• ChromaKey1Map — Select this option to have the chroma key color map or
alpha for the first chroma key on the MLE used as the video source for the Clean
Feed. The first chroma key on the MLE is the first (lowest number) key on the MLE
that is configured as a chroma key.
• ChromaKey2Map — Select this option to have the chroma key color map or
alpha for the second chroma key on the MLE used as the video source for the Clean
Feed. The second chroma key on the MLE is the second key on the MLE that is
configured as a chroma key.
5. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Eng 8–8 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Fade to Black
Fade to Black allows you to have one or all MLEs fade to black with a single button press.
Pressing the button again returns the outputs of the MLEs from black to their previous state.
In an MultiPanel configuration, the fade to black only affects the MLEs that are assigned to the
control panel that the fade to black is performed on, and that fade to black is turned on for. Each
control panel has a unique fade to black rate, but which MLEs that fade to black is turned on for is
common across all control panels.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Output Fade To Black.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–9
MLE Tally
The MLE Tally feature allows you to force a selected MLE to always function as if it is on air,
regardless of whether or not it is re-entered on the Program/Preset Bus. For example, you may
want to send the output of MLE 1 to an external device, such as a VTR, while the Program/Preset
bus is on-air. In this configuration, you may want both MLE 1 and the Program/Preset Bus to be
tallied. To achieve this, the MLE Tally feature must be used.
In a MultiPanel configuration, the highest number MLE assigned to each panel is tallied as the
Program MLE (Always).
Eng 8–10 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Ancillary Data
The Ancillary Data setup allows you to select which lines in the vertical and horizontal blanking
area (Figure 8.2) can be stripped or passed, as well which line the video image starts on. This
allows you to protect and pass information such as embedded audio, or closed captioning, with
the video signal.
Field and Frame line numbers depend on the video format the switcher is operating in. If the
switcher is operating in a Progressive Scan video format, no even or odd information is displayed.
Horizontal Blanking
Line 0 (even) / Line 263 (odd)
Vertical Blanking
Line 20 (even) / Line 283 (odd)
Video Image Start
Video Image
Ancillary data parameters are set independently for each video format. Changing video formats
recalls the last saved parameters for the selected video format.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–11
Operating Tip — Press Default Anc Data on the Output Menu 2-2 to restore the ancillary
data setting to their default values for the current video format.
Eng 8–12 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Switch on Field
The Switch On feature allows you to set on which field the switcher will perform a transition in
an Interlaced video format. This option is not available if the switcher is operating in a
Progressive Scan video format.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–13
MultiViewer
The MultiViewer™ allows you to view ten video sources from a single output BNC, or have the
MultiViewer output routed to an Aux Bus. Any video source on the switcher, including Program,
Preview, Media-Store channels, and MLE re-entries, can be assigned to any box on the
MultiViewer. All the boxes on the MultiViewer include mnemonic source names and red and
green tallies.
Note — MultiViewer cannot output a 1080p video format. If the switcher is operating in this
video format, the MultiViewer feature will output 1080i.
Source 1 Source 2
MultiViewer Assignment
The MultiViewer options allow you to assign up to two MultiViewers to each Video Processor
Board. The resources provided by a Video Processor Board can be assigned to either an MLE or a
MultiViewer. The other MLE/MultiViewer on the Video Processor Board is unaffected.
Note — When an MLE is assigned as a MultiViewer, or back to an MLE, the Video Processor
Board providing the MLE must reboot for the change to take effect.
Eng 8–14 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
4. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports. All Video Processor Board that changes were made on will reboot.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support. All Video Processor Board that changes were made on will reboot.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
MultiViewer Layouts
Each MultiViewer is assigned a layout that specifies how the boxes are arranged and what source
is assigned to each box in the layout. The size and number of boxes in the layout depends on the
layout that is selected.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–15
2. Select the Layout XX that you want to edit.
3. Press Layout Editor Sources.
Note — Some internal video sources cannot be routed to the MultiViewer directly (using the
MLE Bus Follows for example). When this occurs the video is replaced with a “Source Not
Supported By MultiViewer” message.
7. Press Grid.
Eng 8–16 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Follow Name — Toggle this button on to show the mnemonic source names for
the video shown in the box. Toggle it off to show the name of the bus, BNC, or
internally generated source that the video comes from.
• Red Tally — Toggle this button on to show red tallies.
• Green Tally — Toggle this button on to show green tallies.
13. Adjust the transparency of the background behind the source label as follows:
• Press Transparency.
• Use the Transparency knob to adjust the transparency of the source label
background.
Operating Tip — If you don’t want to save your current changes, you can navigate away
from the menu or press Cancel Changes.
14. Press Save Changes to save the changes to the edited layout.
Naming a Layout
1. Press HOME Setup More MultiViewer.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Change Layout Name Menu to enter a name.
4. Enter the new name for the layout in the New Name field.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–17
5. Press Accept New Name on the Change Layout Name Menu to store the new name.
Eng 8–18 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Mix/DSK
The Mix/DSK option provides a mixer and two (Mix2K) or four (Mix4K) keyers for the bottom
(Program/Preset) MLE in a half MLE switcher. This option must be installed in order to use the
Program/Preset MLE on a half MLE switcher, such as a 2.5 QMD-X.
The Mix/DSK feature can only be activated if a Multi-Definition Video Output Board is installed
in the following slot of your frame:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slot K
• MD-X — Slot K
• QMD — Slot B
• MD — Slot B
Note — If you also have the MultiDSK option, the assignment of the BNCs on the Video Output
Board is different. Refer to the section “Mix/DSK and MultiDSK” on page Eng 8-24 for more
information.
The Mix/DSK option assigns and locks certain BNCs on the Video Output Board to the main
switcher output video signals (Table 8.3).
Operating Tip — Output #07 in a Mix2K system is automatically set to Preview with Overlay
when you set up a Mix/DSK. This can be changed later.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–19
Mix/DSK Setup
Setting up the Mix/DSK option activates the Program/Preset MLE on your half MLE switcher,
and assign the Output BNC as indicated. The Mix/DSK software option must be installed in order
to activate it.
Note — Turning this option Off for your half MLE switcher will prevent you from using your
Program/Preset MLE. Turning this feature On for a full MLE switcher reverts your full
Program/Preset MLE to a half MLE.
Mix/DSK Operation
The Mix/DSK option provides a limited Mixer and Keyers to the Program/Preset MLE of your
switcher. For the operation of the Program/Preset MLE on a half MLE switcher, the following
restrictions apply:
• You can perform Cuts and Dissolves, but not Wipes, DVE or SEQ effects.
• You can perform Auto Select Keys and Self Keys, but not Chroma Keys or Preset
Pattern Keys.
• You can perform Key Invert effects, but not Mask, Matte Fill or Wash effects.
• The Clean Feeds are locked to before each key (Figure 8.4).
Eng 8–20 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
BKGD/ Mix/DSK Mix/DSK Mix/DSK Mix/DSK
PGM
PST KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
MIX CLEAN 4
MIX CLEAN 3
MIX CLEAN 2
MIX CLEAN 1
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–21
MultiDSK
The MultiDSK™ option provides two (Multi2K) or four (Multi4K) additional Downstream
Keyers for your Program/Preset MLE (highest number MLE). The MD/X switchers can only
support the Multi2K option.
The MultiDSK feature can only be activated if a Multi-Definition Video Output Board is installed
in the following slot in your frame:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slot K
• MD-X — Slot K
• QMD — Slot B
• MD — Slot B
Note — If you also have the Mix/DSK option, the assignment of the BNCs on the Video Output
Board is different. Refer to the section “Mix/DSK and MultiDSK” on page Eng 8-24 for more
information.
The MultiDSK option assigns and locks certain BNCs on the Video Output Board to the main
switcher output video signals (Table 8.4).
The Clean Feeds for the MultiDSK option are locked to before each key (Figure 8.5).
MULTI CLEAN 8
MULTI CLEAN 7
MULTI CLEAN 6
MULTI CLEAN 5
CLEAN 2
CLEAN 1
Eng 8–22 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
MultiDSK Setup
Setting up the MultiDSK option adds additional Downstream Keyers to the Program/Preset MLE,
and assigns the Output BNC as indicated. The MultiDSK software option must be installed in
order to activate it.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Output Mix/DSK MultiDSK.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–23
Mix/DSK and MultiDSK
If you have the MultiDSK option installed on your half MLE switcher, certain Output BNCs are
assigned and locked to the main switcher output video signals (Table 8.5).
The Clean Feeds for the Mix/DSK and MultiDSK options are locked to before each key (Figure
8.5).
MULTI CLEAN 4
MULTI CLEAN 3
MIX CLEAN 2
MIX CLEAN 1
Eng 8–24 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Output Mix/DSK MultiDSK.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–25
AuxKeys
The AuxKeys™ option can be used as either an A/B Mixer (Mix between two Aux Buses) or a
Mixer/Keyer (Mix and Auto Select Key). Switcher outputs are assigned to AuxKeys in groups of
four. Mix or Key operations can be previewed and Clean Feed is also available, similar to a
standard MLE.
The AuxKeys option allows you to assign and lock certain BNCs on the Video Output Board to
the main switcher outputs. The BNCs on each Video Output Board are separated into groups of 4.
Assigning one of these groups to either Aux Keys or Aux Mix/Keys locks the first few BNCs in
that group, depending on which option you select.
The AuxKey feature can only be activated on a Multi-Definition Video Output Board.
An example of possible Output BNC assignments are as follows:
AuxKeys Setup
Setting up the AuxKey option adds an Aux Mixer, or Aux Mixer/Keyer to the selected Aux Bus,
and assign the Output BNCs as indicated. The AuxKey software option must be installed in order
to activate it.
Note — The AuxKeys outputs are only available to the Output BNCs that you assign them to
and cannot be routed to the main switcher output internally. Refer to the section “AuxKey Pre
Mixer/Keyer” on page Eng 8-28 for information on re-entering an AuxKey externally to the
switcher.
Eng 8–26 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Output Output Boards.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–27
› Background — Select this option to have the video signal selected on the
Background bus of the AuxKey fed out the selected Aux Bus.
› Preset — Select this option to have the video signal selected on the Preset
bus of the AuxKey fed out the selected Aux Bus.
› Key — Select this option to have the video signal selected on the Keyer bus of
the AuxKey fed out the selected Aux Bus.
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus output that you want to assign to the
selected output. The sources selected on the corresponding bus is fed out of the
selected Aux Bus, and does interfere with the dedicated AuxKey output.
Operating Tip — If you select different sources on an Aux Bus assigned to the Background,
Preset, or Key Bus of the AuxKey, the new source is selected on the corresponding bus of the
AuxKey, without having to assign the Crosspoint Group to an AuxKey.
Important — The Pre Mixer/Keyer option can only correct the timing for a single pass through
the switcher. Do not attempt to re-enter AuxKeys as sources on an AuxKey that you intend to
re-enter on an MLE. For example, AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer 1 is re-entered into AuxKey Pre
Mixer/Keyer 2 that is re-entered into MLE 1.
An AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer is re-entered into the switcher by physically connecting a BNC
cable from the dedicated output BNCs of the AuxKey, to the available input BNCs (Figure 8.7).
For example, if the AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer is assigned to output group #K09-K12, the BNC
cables are connected from those output BNCs to 3 input BNCs. When the input BNCs are
selected on the crosspoint bus, the properly timed output of the AuxKey is shown.
Eng 8–28 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
LAN1 LAN2
PERIPH1 1
CPU
LTC A
2
PS 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 11
1 12 13
3 14
1 15 16
OUT
B
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 11
1 12
1 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 11
1 12
1 13
13 14 15
15 16
16
PS 2
D
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 11
1 12 13
3 14
1 15 16
E
IN
MAXIMUM
RATING
1950W
Figure 8.7 AuxKey Mix/Pre output re-entered into available input BNCs (QMD Shown)
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–29
Eng 8–30 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Basic Communications Setup
In This Chapter
This chapter provides general information on installing and initializing FlexDevice™ drivers, and
setting up communication with peripheral equipment. For complete information on setting up a
specific class of device, refer to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your particular
device.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Communications Overview
• Installing and Managing FlexDevice Drivers
• Setting Up Communications
• Port Expanders
• External Panel Modules
• Custom Devices
• Extra Options
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–1
Communications Overview
The Vision switcher can interface with a number of peripheral devices, such as video servers,
audio mixers, routers, character generators, and robotic cameras. These devices interface with the
switcher using either serial or ethernet communication. Devices that use serial communication
and can be connected to either the control panel or the frame. Ethernet devices must be connected
to the same network as the switcher.
Device Drivers
Devices are connected to the switcher using either the built-in device drivers or individual
FlexDevice™ drivers. Refer to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device for
information on which interface must be used with your device.
Note — Do not mix different drivers (built-in and FlexDevice driver, or different versions of
FlexDevice or built-in drivers) when connecting to the same device. Doing so may cause
unexpected control errors.
Individual FlexDevice drivers are uploaded to the switcher using the QMD/X Web Interface.
Once a driver has been uploaded to the switcher, an instance of that driver is initialized and
assigned to the port that the device is connected to. A single instance of a FlexDevice driver
controls a single device. If you are connecting multiple devices of the same type to the switcher,
you must activate multiple instances of that driver.
Eng 9–2 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Peripheral Ports
CPU
LTC
2
10/100 10/100 USB
Ethernet Communications
The following section presents a brief overview of the ethernet connection process. The exact
steps taken in connecting your peripheral equipment and the Vision switcher via an ethernet
network depends on the network topology of your facility.
1. Connect the device to the same subnet as your Vision switcher or to a network that has a
route to the network your switcher is on. Make a note of the IP Address and Port
Number of your device as this information is required when configuring the
communication settings on your Vision switcher.
• Network topologies vary greatly between facilities. Contact your IT Department for
assistance in connecting your device to the appropriate network at your location.
• Refer to the documentation that came with your device for instructions on
connecting it to your network.
2. Configure the ethernet settings on your device to communicate with the Vision switcher.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–3
Installing and Managing FlexDevice Drivers
FlexDevice drivers are individually installed onto the switcher using the QMD/X Web Interface.
Once the driver has been installed onto the switcher, you must initialize an instance of the
FlexDevice driver for each device you want to control from the switcher.
Note — Not all external devices are currently supported by FlexDevice drivers. Refer to the
Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device for information on whether there is a
FlexDevice driver for your device.
FlexDevice Page
Table 9.1 FlexDevice Driver Status
Status Description
OK The driver is fully compatible with the switcher software.
OBSOL The driver is outdated and a new driver should be downloaded.
The driver has not been tested with the current version of switcher
UNSUPP
software. Please contact Ross Video Technical Support.
Eng 9–4 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Initializing FlexDevice Drivers
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Com Setup More Flex Devices.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–5
2. Press Stop Driver.
3. Use the Interface knob to select the control panel or frame that the FlexDevice driver
you want to stop is running on.
4. Use the Type knob to select the type of driver you want to stop.
5. Use the Driver knob to select the driver that you want to stop an instance of.
6. Press Accept to stop the selected instance of the FlexDevice driver.
Eng 9–6 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Setting Up Communications
External device communication is set up from the Communications Menu. This menu allows
you to initialize an instance of a FlexDevice driver, select the communications port that a device
is connected, or assigned to, the type of device it is, the transmission standard that is used, and the
communications protocol.
For specific information on setting up a particular external device with the Vision switcher, refer
to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device.
Note — The status column on the Communications Menu indicates the current compatibility
status of each driver installed on the switcher. If a driver is listed as Obsolete or Unsupported,
download a new driver from the Ross Video web site. If a driver is listed as Missing or Broken,
contact Ross Video Technical Support.
Note — Only the Remote ports on the back of the Master Panel can be used to connect to
external devices at this time.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–7
Device Selection — Communications Menu 1-2
4. Select the driver you want to assign to the communications port as follows:
• Use the Device knob to select the FlexDevice driver, or communications protocol,
you are using. If a message stating that the FlexDevice driver is missing or damaged
is displayed, you must re-install the driver.
Note — If you are connecting a VTR or Video Server, use the VTR Preroll knob on the
Communications Menu 1-2 to select the pre-roll interval, in frames, for your specific Video
Server.
Eng 9–8 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Com Settings (Serial) — Communications Menu 1-2
8. Set the communications protocols for the serial device as follows:
• Use the Baud knob to select the baud rate for communicating with your device.
• Use the Parity knob to select the parity for communicating with your device.
Operating Tip — If you are creating a custom device protocol, refer to the section “Custom
Devices” on page Eng 9-21 for information on creating the protocol.
9. Press Extra Options. Some classes of devices support extra options that must be set.
Refer to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your particular device for more
information.
Note — If you are setting up a Monitor Wall, you must set the IP Address and Port Number of
the Monitor Wall device. If you are not setting up a Monitor Wall, proceed to Step (12.).
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–9
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Note — The status column on the Communications Menu indicates the current compatibility
status of each driver installed on the switcher. If a driver is listed as Obsolete or Unsupported,
download a new driver from the Ross Video web site. If a driver is listed as Missing or Broken,
contact Ross Video Technical Support.
Note — Only the Remote ports on the back of the Master Panel can be used to connect to
external devices at this time.
Eng 9–10 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Device Selection — Communications Menu 1-2
4. Select the driver you want to assign to the communications port as follows:
• Use the Device knob to select the FlexDevice driver, or communications protocol
you are using.
Note — If you are connecting a VTR or Video Server, use the VTR Preroll knob on the
Communications Menu 1-2 to select the pre-roll interval, in frames, for your specific Video
Server.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–11
Com Settings (Ethernet) — Communications Menu 1-2
8. Use the Client/Server knob to select whether the switcher should act as a client or
server. Enter the port settings as follows:
• Client — Select this option if the switcher should act as the client when
communicating with the device. Enter the settings for the switcher as follows:
› In the Remote IP Address field, enter the IP address of the external device.
› In the Remote Port field, enter the port on the external device that the
switcher must connect to.
• Server — Select this option if the switcher should act as the server when
communicating with the device. Enter the settings for the switcher as follows:
› In the Local IP Address list, select the IP address of the switcher that you
want to use to connect with the external device.
› In the Local Port field, enter the port on the switcher that the external device
must connect to.
Note — Do not change the Local Port value unless instructed to do so by Ross Video
Technical Support.
Eng 9–12 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Port Expanders
Port Expanders allow you to increase the number of external devices that can be connected to the
switcher. Port Expanders can be connected to one of the remote ports on the back of a Vision
control panel, or connected as an ethernet device, depending on the Port Expander you have.
The Vision switcher supports communications with a number of Port Expanders. The following
devices are currently supported by your Vision switcher (Table 9.2).
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–13
Table 9.3 Vision -to- BSS4 Serial Port Expander Wiring Chart
Vision Switcher BSS4 Serial Port Expander
Remote Port Signal Master Port Signal
1
2 RxA (Rx-) 2 TxA (Tx-)
3 TxB (Tx+) 3 RxB (Rx+)
4 Ground
5 Ground 5 Ground
6
7 RxB (Rx+) 7 TxB (Tx+)
8 TxA (Tx-) 8 RxA (Rx-)
9
Comtrol DeviceMaster
The Comtrol® DeviceMaster® allows you to connect a number of serial devices to the switcher
through a single ethernet connection. Serial devices connect to the DeviceMaster using a RS-232
or RS-422 connection, and then the DeviceMaster connects to the switcher using a single ethernet
connection. Individual devices are identified by a port number on the DeviceMaster.
The DeviceMaster must be on the same subnet as the switcher to ensure proper functionality.
Note — If you are using a Cisco Systems® brand router, or switch, to connect the Comtrol
DeviceMaster to the switcher, you must disable the BPDU Guard on the Cisco Systems® brand
router or switch to ensure proper communications
The Comtrol DeviceMaster uses a different pinout than the Remote Ports on the Vision control
panel, and supports both the RS-232 (TIA/EIA-232) and RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission
standards (Table 9.4).
Eng 9–14 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Switcher Communications Setup
The Vision switcher needs to be set up with the communications port that the Port Expander is on,
as well as the type, transmission standard, and the protocols for the communications between the
Port Expander and switcher.
If you are using a Comtrol DeviceMaster, use the Net Expander to create the ports on the
DeviceMaster. If you are setting up a DeviceMaster that has more than 4 ports, you must set up
additional Net Expanders. Each Net Expander creates 4 ports.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Com Setup Type.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–15
› NetExp — Select this option to assign a Net Expander to the selected port.
6. Press Com Type.
Eng 9–16 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
BSS4 Programming
Once the switcher has been set up to communicate with the BSS4, you need to program the BSS4.
The Vision switcher will start the programming after you confirm the installation change.
1. Press Continue to start programming the BSS4.
Note — If you press Cancel, a warning message is displayed and you will have to perform the
set up of the BSS4 again.
3. Disconnect the BSS4 Power Supply from the BSS4 to cycle the power Off.
4. Reconnect the BSS4 Power Supply to the BSS4 to cycle the power On.
5. Press Continue on the Vision control panel. A screen will be displayed informing you
that the BSS4 Serial Port Expander has been successfully programmed.
Note — If you get an error message stating that the BSS4 could not be programmed, you
should confirm your settings and try to program the BSS4 again.
Note — If you are connecting a device using the RAP protocol to the DeviceMaster, you must
have Listen unchecked and enter the IP address of the Master Panel in the Connect To: field,
as well as the Local IP Port in the To Port: field. The Local Port is found on the
Communications Menu.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–17
› UDP Connection Configuration — For each serial port on the DeviceMaster,
ensure that Enable Serial to Ethernet, Enable Ethernet to Serial, and Enable Ethernet
Receive from any IP address are unchecked. Leave all other setting at their default
values.
Communication Settings
In order to have the Vision switcher communicate with a Port Expander, the Port Expander and
the switcher must be set up to communicate with each other.
Use the following communications settings (Table 9.5) when connecting your Port Expander to
the Vision switcher. Refer to your Port Expander documentation for additional information on
setting up your Port Expander.
Eng 9–18 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
3. Press More Device Network.
Note — Do not change the Local Port value unless instructed to do so by Ross Video
Technical Support.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–19
External Panel Modules
External Vision panel modules, such as the SideBox, must be set up on the external link port that
it is connected to.
For information on cabling your external panel module to the Vision control panel, refer to the
documentation that came with your external panel module.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Com Setup Type.
Eng 9–20 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Custom Devices
The Custom Device setup feature allows you to program serial command protocols for
controlling external devices not otherwise supported by the Vision switcher. Custom Devices are
also useful in testing currently unsupported commands to external devices, as well as other
communications testing.
Custom Device Protocols are supported for the following device classes:
• VTRs
• Video Servers
• Audio Server
Important — The option for the external device you want to program a custom device
protocol for must be purchased and installed before you can use the custom device protocol.
Note — Refer to the specific chapter on the device you are using for information on setting up
communications for the custom device.
Custom Device commands allow you to select the signals that the switcher will send to the
custom device when you select a command on the switcher.
The supported custom device commands are as follows:
• Seek Timecode
• Rewind
• Frame Reverse
• Play Reverse
• Pause
• Stop
• Play
• Frame Advance
• Fast Forward
• Record
• Diagnostic 1
• Diagnostic 2
• Diagnostic 3
Note — Custom Device protocols support only one-way communication. The switcher does
not record, or act upon, signals being returned from the custom device.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–21
Operating Tip — For more information on the use and limitations of the custom device
protocol, refer to the section “Custom Devices – Uses and Limitations” on page Eng 23-2.
Note — The PLAY command requires the Roll Clip feature (ROLL CLP) in order to tie the
command to a transition.
• FRAME ADVANCE — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
• FAST FORWARD — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
• RECORD — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio servers,
and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
Note — The FADER POSITION command is not currently supported by the Vision QMD/X or
MD/X switcher.
Eng 9–22 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• DIAGNOSTIC 1 — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from custom controls only.
• DIAGNOSTIC 2 — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from custom controls only.
• DIAGNOSTIC 3 — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from custom controls only.
Operating Tip — You can use the Clear Command button to erase all the entries you have
made for the selected command.
5. Insert a byte into the signal for the selected command as follows:
• Press Insert Line to insert a line, or byte, to the command signal.
Operating Tip — You can use the Choose Line knob on the Custom Device Modify Menu
to select the different bytes for editing.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–23
Toggle Special Setup — Custom Devices Modify Menu
• Use the Command Flag knob to select the command flag you want to insert. You
can choose between the following:
› [Break On] — This command flag forces the output to data low.
› [Break Off] — This command releases the Break On command, allowing the
output to go off of data low.
› [Checksum] — This command inserts an 8-bit additive checksum byte.
Note — The Posn X, Posn Y, and Posn Z command flags are not currently supported by the
Vision switcher.
Eng 9–24 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Extra Options
The Communications Menu allows you to set up an external device to operate with the Vision
switcher. This section (Table 9.6) describes each of the extra options on the Communications
Menu.
Not all devices support all extra options. For information on a specific device, refer to the Ross
Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–25
Automation Options
The Clip Lists option allows you to select whether the switcher updates/retrieves the clip list
data from the video servers when Automation is enabled.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher not update/retrieve clip lists from video
Clip Lists
servers when Automation is enabled.
• No — Select this option to have the switcher update/retrieve clip lists from video servers
when Automation is enabled.
CG Options
The Back-to-Back option allows the switcher to preload the second CG page if OverDrive
has back-to-back CG pages in a rundown.
• No — Select this option to have the switcher pause to load the second CG page in a
BackToBack
back-to-back CG rundown from OverDrive.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher preload the second CG page in a
back-to-back CG rundown from OverDrive.
The Display Mode option allows you to select how the CG takes a template to the program
channel when the Take command is issued. You can choose between the following:
• On Trigger — Select this option to have the template remain hidden until the Play
Display Mode
command is sent.
• Immediately — Select this option to have the template taken on-air as soon as the Take
command is issued.
The Play Time option allows you to select the maximum duration for playing an animation,
PlayTime
in seconds.
The Show on Preview option allows you to have a CG page shown on the preview of the CG
when it is prepped by OverDrive.
• No — Select this option to have the switcher take CG pages directly to air when the take
Show On PV command is received, and not show the page on preview when it is prepped.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher tell the CG to show the page on preview
when the page is prepped by OverDrive. The page is taken to program when the take
command is received from OverDrive.
The Software Version option allows you to select the version of software being used on your
CG. You can choose between the following:
• Before 3.0 — Select this option for XPression version 3.0, or earlier.
• Before 5.0 — Select this option if your CG uses .ins or .icg files.
Software Ver • 3.0 or later — Select this option for XPression version 3.0, or later.
• 5.0 or later — Select this option if your CG uses .scribe or .scribelist files.
• XML type — Select this option if your CG uses .xml files.
• Non-Pro — Select this option for all non-professional versions of the character generator.
• Pro — Select this option for all professional versions of the character generator.
The Timeout option allows you to set the length of time that the switcher will wait for a
Timeout
response from a CG before reporting communication lost.
Editor Options
The Bus Mapping option allows you to select either the original GVG4000 bus mapping, or
the current bus map of the switcher.
Bus Mapping • Normal — Select this option to use the original GVG4000 bus mapping.
• Simple — Select this option to use a direct one-to-one mapping to the current bus map of
the switcher.
Eng 9–26 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Editor Options
The Custom Control MLE option allows you to select whether memory recalls on a
particular MLE perform a custom control rather than recalling the memory. The specific
custom control that is run is based on the memory that is being recalled. Memories 1-19
correspond to Bank 1, Custom Controls 1-20; memories 20-39 correspond to Bank 2,
Custom Controls 1-20; and so on. You can choose between the following:
• Any — Select this option to have memory recalls for any MLE run a custom control
rather than recall a memory.
CustCtrl MLE • Pgm-Pst — Select this option to have memory recalls for the Main Program MLE run a
custom control rather than recall a memory.
• MLE1 — Select this option to have memory recalls MLE 1 run a custom control rather
than recall a memory.
• MLE2 — Select this option to have memory recalls MLE 2 run a custom control rather
than recall a memory.
• MLE3 — Select this option to have memory recalls MLE 3 run a custom control rather
than recall a memory.
The Editor Type option allows you to select the type of editor you are connecting to the
Editor Type
selected communications port.
The Pattern option allows you to select how you want to access wipe patterns. You can
choose between the following:
• Pattern # — Select this option to use the wipe pattern numbers to select the wipe on the
Pattern
editor.
• Wipe Bttn — Select this option to use the wipe button numbers to select the wipe on the
editor.
The Use Break option allows you to select whether the switcher must receive a break
command before going into Active Mode. You can choose between the following:
• Yes — Select this option to enable the switcher to go into Active Mode once a Break and
Use Break
an Address is received.
• No — Select this option to enable the switcher to go into Active Mode but the editor sends
commands and messages without Breaks.
Pbus Options
The Query Cmd option allows you to select the type of query commands supported by the
Pbus device. You can choose between the following:
• Relaxed — Select this option to be able to control all devices connected to the Pbus
device whether they respond to the query command or not.
Query Cmd
• Strict — Select this option to be able to control only devices connected to the Pbus device
that respond to query commands.
• Silent — Select this option to be able to control all devices connected to the Pbus device,
without using query commands. The switcher does not sent query commands.
Robotic Camera
Options
The Command Delay option allows you to select the length of time, in 16ms increments,
CmdDelay
that the switcher waits between sending commands to the camera.
Focus Speed The Focus Speed option allows you to select the maximum focus speed.
The Iris Control option allows you to select what you want to control the iris of the camera.
You can choose between the following:
Iris Control
• Lens — Select this option to have the iris controlled by the lens of the camera.
• Camera — Select this option to have the iris controlled by the camera controller.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–27
Robotic Camera
Options
Iris Speed The Iris Speed option allows you to set the speed at which the iris opens and closes.
The Iris Mode option allows you to select how the iris opening is changed. You can choose
between the following:
• Velocity — Select this option to have the iris opening changed by the velocity at which
Iris Mode
the iris ring is turned. Use this option unless the camera is controlling the iris itself.
• Incremental — Select this option to have the iris opening changed incrementally by a
value. Use this option only if the camera is controlling the iris itself.
The Iris Res option allows you to select the number of bits in the camera control signal.
Iris Res Different camera head controllers use different numbers of bits. Choose the value that gives
you a 100% display when the iris is fully open.
The Lens Type option allows you to select the type of lens that is being used on the camera.
You can choose between the following:
Lens Type
• Rainbow — Select this option if the camera uses a Rainbow-CCTV Lens.
• Fujinon — Select this option if the camera uses a Fujinon/Canon Telecon Lens.
The Master Pedestal option allows you to add (Yes) or remove (No) the Pedestal (Black)
Master Ped
button from the Camera Head Control Menu.
The Pan/Tilt Damping option allows you to select the amount of damping you want on pan
Pan/Tilt Damping
and tilt movements. The higher the value, the more damping is applied.
The Pan/Tilt Speed option allows you to select the maximum pan and tilt speed. The higher
Pan/Tilt Speed
the value, the faster the pan and tilt speed.
The Panel ID option allows you to select a unique ID that the camera uses to identify the
Panel ID
Vision switcher.
The Protocol option allows you to select the protocol that is used by the positioner on your
camera controller. You can choose between the following:
• Level 0 — Select this option to disable joystick/positioner control.
Protocol • Level 1 — Select this option to enable Pan, Tilt, Zoom, and Focus control.
• Level 3 — Select this option to enable Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Iris, Mped (Black Level)
and Elevation control.
• Level 4 — Select this option to enable all for controls of Level 3, plus Shot Store.
The RclTime option allows you to select the amount of time that the switcher allows for a
RclTime
camera to recall a shot.
The Poll option allows you to select which camera is polled. You can choose between the
following:
Poll • Selected — Select this option to have only the currently selected camera polled. Only
use this option if instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
• All — Select this option to have all cameras polled.
The Select Delay option allows you select the length of time, in fields, that the switcher will
Select Delay
wait after selecting a camera.
The SerialSwitch option allows you to select the type of serial switch you are using to
connect to your camera. You can choose between the following:
• STS-12 — Select this option to assign an STS-12 Serial Control Transfer Switch to the
SerialSwitch selected port.
• CP-RMR-S — Select this option to assign a CP-RMR-S Serial Receiver to the selected
port.
• DS-4 — Select this option to assign a DS-4 Device Server to the selected port.
Eng 9–28 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Robotic Camera
Options
ShotOffset The ShotOffset option allows you to select whether shots are indexed based on 0 or 1.
Zoom Speed The Zoom Speed option allows you to select the maximum zoom speed.
The Z Speed option allows you to select the speed that height or elevation changes are
Z Speed
performed.
Router Options
Base The Base option allows you to select whether the router starts counting crosspoints at 0 or 1.
The Level Base option allows you to select whether the router starts counting levels at 0 or
Level Base
1.
The Num Level option allows you to select the number of levels that the router is using.
Num Levels This sets the number of levels that the router switches when the input source from the router
is set to All levels.
The Src & Dest Base option allows you to select whether the router starts counting source
Src & Dest Base
and destinations at 0 or 1.
The Xpts option allows you to select the number of crosspoints that are available on the
Xpts
router.
Serial Tally Options
The At Black option allows you to set the at black action for the tally interface. You can
select between the following:
• All Off — Select this option to have the switcher report that nothing is on-air when the
At Black
switcher is as black.
• Active On — Select this option to have the switcher not report anything different when
the switcher is at black.
The Data Txfr option allows you to set the message size protocol for the tally device. You
Data Txfr
can select Minimal, Normal, or Complete.
The Rate option allows you to select the rate, in fields, between update messages sent by the
Rate
switcher to the tally device.
The Slot 1 option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the first MLE Slot
Slot 1
on the tally device.
The Slot 2 option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the second MLE
Slot 2
Slot on the tally device.
The Slot 3 option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the third MLE
Slot 3
Slot on the tally device.
The Slot PGM option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the Program
Slot PGM
MLE Slot on the tally device.
The Source Name option allows you to set the input name that the switcher passes to the
tally device. You can choose between the following:
Source Name • Router Src — Select this option to use the router source names that are being passed
through the switcher from a router.
• Source Name — Select this option to use the input source name.
Start The Start option allows you to select None or Init as the start message for the tally device.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–29
Video Server
Options
The Clip List option allows you to associate a Video Server with either Clip List A or Clip
List B, or use the Floating list. Clip List A and Clip List B are cached for fast access when
Clip List
the associated Video Server is selected. Each Clip List can only be associated with one
physical device.
The Cmd Queuing option allows you to select whether the switcher must receive replies for
every command sent to the Video Server. You can choose between the following:
• Strict — Select this option to have the switcher require a confirmation message from the
Cmd Queuing Video Server for each command. The switcher will re-send a command (as set by the Send
Tries value) until it receives a confirmation message from the Video Server.
• Relaxed — Select this option to have the switcher not require a confirmation message
from the Video Server for each command.
The Cue & Pause option sets whether the switcher sends a pause command immediately
after a cue command. This allows you to have the video server cue a clip and advance it so
that you can preview the first frame of the clip.
Cue & Pause • No — Select this option to not have the switcher send the pause command immediately
after the cue command.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher send the pause command immediately after
the cue command.
The Eject Clip option sets whether the video server ejects the current clip before it cues the
next clip.
• No — Select this option to not have the video server eject a clip before it cues the next
Eject Clip
clip.
• Yes — Select this option to have the video server eject a clip before it cues the next clip.
This will often default the video output to black.
The ExtendedChar option allows you to set whether the switcher allows non-printing
characters for clip IDs. You can choose between the following:
ExtendedChar
• No — Select this option to have the switcher replace non-printing characters with spaces.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher use the extended character set.
The LoopMinLength option allows you to set the minimum length of a clip, in seconds, that
LoopMinLength
can be looped. The minimum length is three (3) seconds.
The LoopRecueTime option allows you to set the amount of time, in frames, before the end
LoopRecueTime
of a clip that the switcher sends a loop command.
The MediaIDLength option allows you to select the maximum character length of the clip
IDs displayed on the VTR Clips, Inpoint/Outpoint, and Remote Control Menus. You can
MediaIDLength choose between the following:
• Short IDs — Select this option if your device uses an ID length of up to 8 characters.
• Long IDs — Select this option if your device uses an ID length of up to 32 characters.
The Panel option allows you to select the control panel, in a MultiPanel system, that the
Panel
device is connected to.
The Playback Mode option allows you to set the playback mode that your Video Server is
using. You can choose between the following:
• PB — Select this option if your device does not go to Electronic-to-Electronic (EE) mode.
Playback Mode • PB/EE — Select this option if your device does go to EE mode. If you select this option,
you enable the serial device to automatically go into PB/EE mode. If a stop command is
issued, the device enters EE mode. If a pause command is issued, the device stays in
Playback mode.
Eng 9–30 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Video Server
Options
The Play with Alpha option allows you to have the switcher play both the video and alpha
channels from a video server. Both the video and alpha input sources must have the video
server assigned to them, and must be set up as an auto key to associate the video with the
alpha.
Play w/Alpha • No — Select this option to not have the associated alpha video channel played on the
video server when the video channel is played.
• Yes — Select this option to have both the video and alpha channels played on the video
server at the same time. The switcher does not check the status of the video server
channels before sending the play command in this mode.
The Port Cmds option allows you to set whether your Video Server supports the Open Port,
Select Port, and Close Port commands. You can choose between the following:
Port Cmds
• No — Select this option if your device does not support port commands.
• Yes — Select this option if your device does support port commands.
The Record Time option allows you to set the maximum number of minutes that the Video
Record Time
Server will record for when it received the Record custom control command.
The Send Tries option allows you to specify the number of times that the switcher will try to
Send Tries send the same command to the Video Server if the switcher has not received a confirmation
response.
The Status Interval option allows you to specify amount of time that the switcher waits
StatusInterval
between status check requests of the video server.
The Status Tries option allows you to specify the number of times that the switcher will send
Status Tries
a status check request to a video server without getting a ready response.
The TargetMachine option allows you to select the video server that you are assigning to the
TargetMachine
selected communications port.
The TimeOut option allows you to select the length of time, in fields, that the switcher will
TimeOut
wait for a reply from the Video Server before trying to send a command again.
VTR Options
The Decode NAKs (Not Acknowledgement) option allows you to have the switcher decode
the NAK messages sent from the VTR to the switcher. The NAK messages must be decoded
for the switcher to act on them. You can choose between the following:
Decode NAKs • No — Select this option to have the switcher not decode the NAK messages. Only select
this option if you are encountering problems using the Play command with your device or
as advised by Ross Video Technical Support.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher decode the NAK messages.
The NPlayRetries option allows you to set the number of times the switcher attempts to send
NPlayRetries
a Play command to the VTR.
The Request Timecode option allows you have the switcher request timecode information
from the VTR. The timecode information can then be displayed on the Remote Control
Menu, as well as the preview overlay.
Request TC • No — Select this option to have the switcher not request timecode information.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher request timecode information. If the
timecode information is returned from the VTR, it is displayed on the Remote Control
Menu and preview overlay.
The TargetMachine option allows you to select the video server that you are assigning to the
TargetMachine
selected communications port.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–31
VTR Options
The Wait nFields option allows you to set the length of time the switcher waits before
Wait nFields
assuming that a Play command failed, or was not received by the VTR.
Eng 9–32 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Custom Controls
In This Chapter
This chapter provides general information on setting up and naming custom control banks, as
well as programming, naming, and editing custom control buttons.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Custom Controls
• Custom Control Interfaces
• Custom Control Banks
• Programming Control Panel Functions
• Programming Special Functions
• Attaching Custom Controls to Panel Buttons
• Naming Custom Controls
• Editing Custom Controls
• Managing Custom Controls
• Deleting Custom Controls
• Custom Control Shortcuts
• Device Transport Commands
• Custom Control Variable Pause
Operating Tip — A Custom Control Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track
of which custom control have been programmed. Refer to the section “Custom Control
Worksheets” on page Eng 21-18 for a copy of this worksheet.
Note — When recording a memory recall in a custom control, it may be necessary to add a
pause of between 1-10 frames after the memory recall.
SOURCE HIDE
MLE 1 MLE 2 SRC PV PGM CUT FADE
OVER
ALL
MLE
1
MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 2 CLEAR
MLE
3 LINK
FRAMES
Operating Tip — You can save the number of buttons you assign to Bank buttons by using
the Bank shortcut. Refer to the section “Custom Control Shortcuts” on page Eng 10-34 for
more information.
Operating Tip — Select NONE if you want to disable a bank that you have previously set
up. This does not delete the custom controls on that bank. Assigning that bank to a button
again, allows the custom controls on that bank to be accessible again.
Operating Tip — You can revert the name of a bank or shortcut to the default at any time by
pressing Default on the Bank Names Menu. This will not default any custom mnemonic
settings.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Bank/Function Names Menu to enter a name, or set up the
mnemonics for the custom control button.
• Enter the new name for the custom control bank or shortcut in the New Name field.
The name can be no more than 13 characters in length.
3. Press Accept New Name to store the new name and mnemonic settings.
4. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Note — Entering the Custom Control Menu stops all custom controls that were started from
that control panel, but does not affect running custom controls that were started from other
control panels. You can still start a custom control from another control panel.
Operating Tip — You can record a custom control to a Bank button, however, you will not be
able to run that custom control directly from the control panel.
1. Press HOME Custom Controls. If the Custom Control button is grayed out, the
Custom Control Menu is being displayed on another panel connected to the system.
Important — Custom Control buttons with an or an @ next to them have already been
programmed. For information on editing this custom control, refer to the section “Editing
Custom Controls” on page Eng 10-29.
3. Press Start Recording. The custom control button that is being recorded to starts to
flash, indicating that a custom control is being recorded to that custom control button.
MLE 2
MLE 3 On-Air
If you record the same events as a relative custom control, you could recall the button presses
made on MLE 2 on MLE 1 (Figure 10.4), if MLE 1 is re-entered into MLE 3.
MLE 3 On-Air
Note — Relative Custom Controls can only be properly recorded and run on upper MLEs that
are re-entered onto the PGM/PST MLE. If the MLE is not re-entered, you will not be able to
properly record or run a relative custom control. Instead, the relative custom control will act like
a normal custom control when run.
Relative custom controls are not MLE specific, as normal custom controls, but instead are
re-entry specific. This means that the re-entry order, or levels that the relative custom control was
recorded on, do not need to be the same in order to run that custom control. For example, if we
again record a relative custom control on MLE 2, which is re-entered into MLE 3 (Figure 10.3),
we can run that relative custom control with more or fewer MLEs. If we have MLE 1 re-entered
into MLE 2 and MLE 2 re-entered into MLE 3 (Figure 10.5), the relative custom control is run
on MLE 1.
MLE 1
MLE 2
MLE 3 On-Air
Figure 10.5 MLE 1 Re-entered into MLE 2, Re-entered into MLE 3, the Program/Preset MLE
Important — If you record a relative custom control across multiple re-entered MLEs, at least
the same number of MLEs must be re-entered in order to run the entire custom control. For
example, if a relative custom control that uses 2 MLEs is run on a one MLE switcher, the actions
to be run on the second MLE are ignored.
If we have no MLEs re-entered (Figure 10.6), the relative custom control is run on MLE 3.
MLE 3 On-Air
You can run the same relative custom control on multiple control panels at the same time.
However, a relative custom control can only be stopped from the control panel that it was started
on. The same relative custom control is treated as an independent custom on each control panel.
Important — Custom Control buttons with an or an @ next to them have already been
programmed. For information on editing this custom control, refer to the section “Editing
Custom Controls” on page Eng 10-29.
4. Press Start Relative Recording. The custom control button that is being recorded to
starts to flash, indicating that a custom control is being recorded to that custom control
button.
5. Press the buttons on the control panel that you want to have recorded in the custom
control. Refer to the section “Tips for Working with Custom Controls” on page Eng
10-2 for more information on what types of actions can be recorded into a control panel
custom control.
6. Press Finish Recording to finish recording to the custom control. The custom control
button stops flashing.
Important — The switcher does not track custom controls that are started as part of another
custom control. Running multiple custom controls that start the same custom control, or editing
a custom control that is run by another custom control, could produce unexpected results. Only
Relative custom controls can have multiple instances of the same custom control running at the
same time.
Operating Tip — You can insert a Stop Other Custom Controls command that will stop all
other running custom controls, except the one that is currently running.
If the Multiple Custom Controls feature is turned off, a Run Custom Control command ends the
current custom control. Pressing another custom control button also stops the first custom control
and starts the second (Figure 10.8).
Custom
Control #2
Run Custom
Control Command
Custom
Control #1
Manually Start
Custom Control
Custom
Control #3
You must have the multiple custom controls feature enabled from the Personality Menu to be able
to run multiple custom controls.
Note — Entering the Custom Control Menu stops all custom controls that were started from
that control panel, but does not affect running custom controls that were started from other
control panels.
1. Press HOME Custom Controls. If the Custom Control button is grayed out, the
Custom Control Menu is active on another panel connected to the system.
2. Select the custom control you want to record to.
3. Press Start Recording Insert Special.
The Reset Fader custom control allows you to reset the audio fader channel
Reset Fader
assignments back to the default setting of the audio fader map.
Special The AFV Off custom control turns off normal Audio Follow Video (AFV)
functionality. Audio channel assigned to video sources will not automatically
Audio Mixer AFV Off be taken on-air with the video source. Audio channel can still be taken on-air
manually. The AFV Off functionality remains active until the AFV On
custom control is run.
The AFV On custom control returns the switcher to normal Audio Follow
AFV On
Video (AFV) functionality, after the AFV Off custom control was run.
The AFV Hold custom control allows you to have audio channel assigned to
AFV Hold video sources automatically taken on-air with the video source, but are
unchanged when the video source is taken off-air.
The Assign Audio custom control has two roles when working with audio. In
normal mode, it allows you to access the levels for the audio channel or group
Assign Audio you have assigned to that button. In audio override mode, it allows you to
perform audio only transition and override the normal audio follow video
operation.
The Audio All Off custom control allows you to fade all audio channels on
either the program or preset bus off. This can be useful for quickly removing
Audio All Off
all audio from either bus, or taking all audio channels off-air after you have
performed an Audio Memory Recall.
The Audio Channel Off custom control allows you to turn an audio channel,
or group, off. This can be useful if you want to take an audio channel, or
group, off-air at once. You can use the Audio Channel Off for either the
Audio CH Off program or preset buses.
You can include a number of Audio Channel Off events in a single custom
control, allowing you to turn multiple audio channels, or groups, off for either
the Program or Preset buses.
The Audio Channel On custom control allows you to turn an audio channel,
or group, on at the level it was last on at, or leave it unchanged as the channel
is already on-air. This can be useful if you want to take an audio channel, or
group, on-air at once. You can use the Audio Channel On for either the
Audio CH On program or preset buses.
You can include a number of Audio Channel On events in a single custom
control, allowing you to turn multiple audio channels, or groups, on for either
the program or preset buses. Unlike the Audio Memory function, the Reset
Audio will return the switcher to audio follow video operation.
The Audio Memory custom control allows you to recall a memory that has
been stored on the Audio Mixer. This can be used to take a number of audio
Audio Memory channels on-air at different levels all at once. Refer to the documentation that
came with your Audio Mixer for more information on storing audio
memories.
The Audio Mute Off custom control allows you to un-mute an audio channel,
Aud Mute Off
or group. This is the same as pressing mute on the Audio Mixer.
The Audio Mute On custom control allows you to mute an audio channel, or
Aud Mute On
group. This is the same as pressing mute on the Audio Mixer.
The Reset Audio custom control allows you to return to the normal audio
follow video mode and remove all currently selected overrides. This can be
Reset Audio
performed for either the program or the preset bus. You must set up two
custom controls if you want to perform both independently.
Insert Audio The Go To Cut custom control allows you to have the Audio Server cue to a
Audio Server Go To Cut
Server selected cut or track. You must select the clip
The Pause custom control allows you to have the Audio Server go into pause
Pause
mode.
The Play custom control allows you to have the Audio Server go into play
Play
mode, or 1× forward
Stop The Stop custom control allows you to have the Audio Server stop.
The Execute Macro custom control allows you to have a custom control on
the switcher trigger a macro on a character generator. Enter the macro
command you want to run in the Macro Name field (up to 62 characters). For
example, to open and execute a macro on a Chyron, enter
Character “Lyric.Open<name>”. Additional commands can be sent to the CG by
Execute Macro Insert CG
Generator inserting another Execute Macro custom control.
Note: You must insert a pause between execute macro commands in a custom
control to ensure that there is enough time for each event to be processed
properly.
The GPI custom control allows you to trigger a GPI input on the CG. Use the
GPI
keypad on the Global Memory Module to select the GPI you want to trigger.
The Load custom control allows you to load a page or template into the
Character Generator Program channel. Use the keypad on the Global
Load To PGM
Memory Module to select the template and layer you want. Press Change
Template to enter a new template, and Layer to enter a new layer.
The Read custom control allows you to load a page or template into the
Character Generator Preview channel. Use the keypad on the Global Memory
Read
Module to select the template and layer you want. Press Change Template
to enter a new template, and Layer to enter a new layer.
The Resume custom control allows you to resume playing an animation that
Resume was paused. Use the keypad on the Global Memory Module to select the layer
you want. Press Layer On and use the Layer knob to enter a new layer.
The Sequence Next custom control allows you to select the previous effect in
Seq Next
the sequence.
The Sequence Previous custom control allows you to select the next effect in
Seq Prev
the sequence.
The Sequence Take custom control allows you to take the current effect in the
Seq Take
sequence on-air.
The Set folder custom control allows you to set the default folder for pages or
Set Folder
templates.
The Take custom control allows you to play the next effect that is cued up on
the Character Generator. The next effect will be on the preview (PV) of the
Take
Character Generator and will be taken to the program (PGM) of the Character
Generator with this custom control.
The Take Out custom control allows you to clear all graphics from the
Take Out specified channel. Press Layer On and use the Layer knob to enter a new
layer.
Insert DVE The Frame Advance custom control advances the DVE effect forward by one
DVE Frame Advance
frame.
The Frame Reverse custom control allows you to reverse the DVE effect
Frame Reverse
backwards by one frame.
The Go To End custom control allows you to cue the DVE to the end of its
Go To End
effect.
Go To Start The Go To Start custom control cues the DVE to the start of its effect.
The Key Frame Adv custom control allows you to cue the DVE effect to the
Key Frame Adv
next Keyframe boundary.
The Key Frame Rev custom control allows you to cue the DVE effect to the
Key Frame Rev
previous Keyframe boundary.
Pause The Pause custom control allows you to pause the DVE effect.
Play The Play custom control plays the DVE effect forward.
Play Rev The Play Rev custom control allows you to play the DVE effect in reverse.
The Recall custom control allows you to recall a selected DVE effect (from 1
Recall
to 99).
The Rewind custom control allows you to rewind the DVE effect (simulates a
Rewind
shuttle reverse).
Stop The Stop custom control allows you to top the DVE effect.
Special The Reset GPI custom control allows you to reset the state of an output GPI
GPI Reset GPI connection. This can be used to return an output GPI to a known state if there
is a problem.
The Trigger GPI command allows you to trigger a pre-selected output GPI
Trigger GPI
using a custom control.
Insert Monitor The Assign Channel custom control allows you to program a custom control
Monitor Wall Assign Chan Wall Control to assign a specific input channel to a particular monitor on the Monitor Wall.
Each monitor in a layout requires an input channel for the video it displays.
The Modify Dynamic Text custom control allows you to program a custom
control to assign specific, pre-defined, Dynamic text to a particular text
address on a Monitor Wall layout. The text address will have to be assigned to
a template for a custom control to be able to change the text.
Modify Text There are two types of text labels used on a Monitor Wall: Static and
Dynamic. Static text labels are set during the creation of the Monitor Wall
setup and can only be modified using the tools provided with the Monitor
Wall. Dynamic text labels can be modified at any time from the Vision
switcher.
The Layout custom control allows you to program a custom control to load a
Load Layout specific layout on a Monitor Wall. A Monitor Wall can have several different
layouts created, each with a variety of monitors and inputs.
The Act MLE Trans custom control allows you to have all MLEs that are
Automation: Act contributing to the program output of the switcher, except for the program
OverDrive® MLE Trans
Special
MLE, to be transitioned according to the settings in the MLE Transition
Module.
The Keys Off Air custom control allows you to have all the on-air keys, on all
Automation: Keys
MLEs that are contributing to the program output of the switcher, dissolved
Off Air
off-air. MultiDSK keys are not affected by this custom control.
OverDrive: Take & The Take & Prepare Next custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to take
Prep to current shot on-air and prepare the next shot in the rundown.
OverDrive: Prep The Prepare Next custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to prepare the
Next next shot in the rundown.
OverDrive: Prep The Prepare Previous custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to prepare
Prev the previous shot in the rundown.
The Prepared CC custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to run one of
OverDrive: Prep CC the prepared CC buttons on rundown control. The buttons are numbered 1-6.
• Use the CC knob to select the custom control you want to run.
The On-Air CC custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to run one of the
OverDrive: On-Air on-air CC buttons on rundown control. The buttons are numbered 1-6.
CC
• Use the CC knob to select the custom control you want to run.
The Rundown custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to run a selected
OverDrive: event in a rundown.
Rundown
• Use the Cmd knob to select the command.
Insert Pbus The Recall custom control allows you to have the Pbus device recall a
Pbus Recall memory from the selected register when the custom control is run. You can
choose between 0 and 4095.
The Store custom control allows you to have the Pbus device store a memory
Store to the selected register when the custom control is run. You can choose
between 0 and 4095.
The Recall Shot custom control allows you to recall a shot on a particular
Robotic Insert Robotic robotic camera with a specific duration for the recall to be performed. When
Recall Shot
Camera Camera Control programming this custom control, you are recalling a specific camera on a
remote port by selecting its input source, or input name.
The Resave Last custom control allows you to overwrite the last prepared
shot or recalled move with the current position of the camera. For a move,
Resave Last
only the prepared position is overwritten. You must re-prepare the move
before you can execute it.
The Prepare Move custom control allows you to prepare a camera move on a
Prepare Move
particular camera. Use the Shot knob to select the move you want to prepare.
The Execute Move custom control allows you to execute a prepared camera
Execute Move move on a particular camera. Use the Shot knob to select the move you want
to execute. The move must be prepared before it can be executed.
The Cam All Stop custom control allows you to quickly stop all robotic
Cam All Stop camera operations. Use this command to stop all motion of a robotic camera
with a single command.
The Deselect Cam custom control allows you to deselect the robotic camera
that was last selected. When a camera is selected by the switcher, that camera
Deselect Cam
remains selected until another camera is selected, or the Deselect Cam
custom control is run.
The Grab Positioner custom control allows you to select which camera is
assigned to the positioner by cycling through all the cameras selected on
Grab Positioner preview, one at a time. Each time the custom control is run, the positioner
assignment will jump to the next camera that will go on-air with the next
transition.
Insert RossTalk The SeqIn custom control allows you to load a template to air on a specific
Cmd layer to the output channel selected in the template. The Sequencer focus
moves to this item.
RossTalk SeqIn Take ID — Press Take ID and use the Take ID knob to select the take id for
the template you want to load.
Layer — Press Layer ID and use the Layer ID knob to select the layer you
want to use.
The Take custom control allows you to load a template to air in a specific
frame-buffer and on a specific layer.
Take ID — Press Take ID and use the Take ID knob to select the take id for
the template you want to load.
Take
Layer — Press Layer ID and use the Layer ID knob to select the layer you
want to use.
Frame-Buffer — Press Buffer ID and use the Buffer ID knob to select the
frame-buffer you want to use.
ClearAllFB The ClearAllFB custom control allows you to clear all frame-buffers.
The Read custom control allows you to take the current selection in the
Read
Sequencer to air.
The Next custom control allows you to take the current selection in the
Next
Sequencer to air and advance the current selection to the next item in the list.
The Up custom control allows you to move the current selection in the
Up
Sequencer to the item above in the list.
The Down custom control allows you to move the current selection in the
Down
Sequencer to the item below in the list.
The Focus custom control allows you to set the Sequencer focus to a specific
template.
Focus
Take ID — Press Take ID and use the Take ID knob to select the take id for
the template you want to load.
The GPI custom control allows you to trigger a simulated GPI.
GPI
GPI — Use the GPI knob to select the GPI that you want to use.
Insert Router The Fire Router Salvo custom control allows to fire a salvo on the router. You
Control will have to program your salvos on the router itself in order to be able to fire
Router Fire Salvo
them. Refer to your router documentation for information on storing a salvo
on your particular router.
The Take XPT custom control allows to you change the source and
Take XPT
destination on the router with a single custom control.
Video Server/ Insert VTR The Fast Forward custom control allows you to have the VTR go into full fast
Fast Forward
VTR forward mode.
The Frame Advance custom control allows you to have the VTR move (jog)
Frame Advance
the video one frame forward.
The Frame Reverse custom control allows you to have the VTR move (jog)
Frame Reverse
the video one frame reverse.
Select this command to have the VTR cue to a selected clip. When you select
Go To Clip Go To Clip, the Clip knob appears, allowing you to select the number (00-99)
for the clip you want to cue up.
The In Flag Reset custom control allows you to turn the Entry In mode on the
In Flag Reset VTR off. When the Entry In mode is off, the VTR will rewind the preroll time
when Preroll command is issued.
The In Recall custom control allows you to turn the Entry In mode on the
VTR on. When the Entry In mode is on, the VTR will go to the in-entry point
In Recall that has previously been set on the VTR, minus the preroll, when the Preroll
command is issued. The in-entry point is set from the VTR, and not from the
switcher.
The Play custom control allows you to play a video clip (with alpha if the
Play option is set for the device). The switcher will confirm the status of the video
server, and then send the play command.
The Play Loop Off custom control allows you to have a currently looping clip
Play Loop Off
stop playing the next time it reaches the end.
The Play Loop On custom control allows you to have the currently cued and
Play Loop On
playing clip loop back to the beginning when it finished playing.
The Play no Stat custom control allows you to play a video clip (with alpha if
Play no Stat the option is set for the device). The switcher does not confirm the status of
the video server, but immediately sends the play command.
The Preroll custom control allows you to have the VTR go to the predefined
in-entry, minus a set preroll time, when In Recall is active. When In Recall is
Preroll not active, the VTR will rewind the pre-roll time from the current point. The
in-entry point and preroll time are set from the VTR, and not from the
switcher.
The Record custom control allows you to have the VTR go into record mode.
You must use the Stop custom control to stop the recording. It is a good
Record
practice to create a Stop custom control before creating the Record custom
control so that you can stop the recording.
The Rewind custom control allows you to have the VTR go into full fast
Rewind
rewind mode.
The Standby Off custom control allows you to take the VTR out of standby
mode. When not in standby mode, the heads of the VTR are removed from
Standby Off the tape, showing noise or black on the video output.
This command will only work if the VTR is stopped.
The Standby On custom control allows you to put the VTR in standby mode.
In standby mode, the heads of the VTR are engaged, showing video on the
Standby On
video output. The VTR automatically goes into this mode when the Play,
Rewind, Fast Forward, or Pause commands are issued.
The Stop custom control allows you to have the VTR perform a stop and
Stop
eject. This command stops the selected channel, and unloads the clip.
The Count Down/Up custom control allows you to have the custom control
Count Down/Up start the time clock counting down from a preset time to 0, and then back.
This will continue until the Reset or Stop command is given.
The Reset custom control allows you to have the custom control reset the
Reset time clock to the time selected using the Reset Time knob on the Insert
Time Clock Menu.
The Stop custom control allows you to have the custom control stop the time
Stop
clock.
Special The Go To Menu command allows you to use a custom control to navigate to
Menus Go To Menu a particular menu. This allows you to quickly jump between frequently used
menus without having to navigate through the menu system.
Special The Cut Keys custom control allows you create a custom control that will cut
Transitions Cut Keys
keys on or off on a particular MLE, or for the MultiDSK Keyers.
Special The Safe Title custom control allows you to create a custom control that will
Safe Title Safe Title
recall a specific safe title configuration on the preview overlay.
Special The Hold CC custom control allows you place a command in a custom
control that will stop a custom control where the hold is placed in the custom
Custom control. To continue the custom control, you must press the custom control
Hold CC button again, or use a GPI trigger.
Control
The mnemonic for the custom control shows Held when the custom control
is at hold.
The Hold for Group custom control allows you to place a command in a
custom control that will stop a custom control where the hold is placed in the
custom control. The custom control will hold until the Run Held Group
custom control event is triggered for the group that the Hold For Group
command was assigned to. For example, if you insert the Hold For Group A
Hold For Group command into two custom controls and Hold For Group B into another two
custom controls, the Run Held Group A event will only resume the first two
(group A) custom control. The remaining two (group B) custom controls will
remain holding until the Run Held Group B event is triggered.
The mnemonic for the custom control shows HldFor Run when the custom
control is at hold.
The Hold for Run custom control allows you to place a command in a custom
control that will stop a custom control where the hold is placed in the custom
control. The custom control will hold until the Run All Held CCs custom
Hold For Run control event is triggered.
The mnemonic for the custom control shows HldFor Run when the custom
control is at hold.
The Loop CC custom control allows you to have a custom control run
Loop CC continuously until you stop it, or a Stop Custom Control command is
executed from another custom control.
The Notify End CC custom control is for internal use only. Only use this
Notify End CC
custom control if instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
The Run Held custom control allows you to resume all of the custom controls
Run Held that are at hold from a Hold or Hold For Run event. Custom controls that are
at hold from a Hold For Group event are unaffected.
The Run Held Group custom control allows you to resume all of the custom
controls that are at hold from the Hold For Group event for the same group.
Only the custom controls that used the Hold For Group event, and are of the
same group, resume. For example, if you insert the Hold For Group A
Run Held Group
command into two custom controls and Hold For Group B into another two
custom controls, the Run Held Group A event will only resume the first two
(group A) custom control. The remaining two (group B) custom controls will
remain holding until the Run Held Group B event is triggered.
The Stop Held X custom control allows you to stop all of the custom controls
that are at hold from the Hold For Group event for the same group. Only the
custom controls that used the Hold For Group event, and are of the same
group, stop. For example, if you insert the Hold For Group A command into
Stop Held X
two custom controls and Hold For Group B into another two custom controls,
the Stop Held Group A event will only stop the first two (group A) custom
control. The remaining two (group B) custom controls will remain holding
until the Stop or Resume Held Group B event is triggered.
Special The Run Sequence custom control allows you to have a custom control run a
sequence on the selected MLE and Keyer. This allows you to run a dissolve
or wipe and still run a sequence in the same MLE. The sequence you want to
run must be loaded before running the custom control.
Sequences Run Sequence
If you are using a Relative Custom Control, you must select the PGM/PST
MLE as the MLE to run the sequence on.
You do not need to have SEQ selected on the Transition Module.
Video Insert Video Refer to the section “Video Checksum Custom Controls” on page Eng
n/a Checksum
Checksums 17-32 for more information on using this diagnostic tool.
Note — The CC/Macro Attachments personality option must be set to on for custom controls
attached to control panel buttons to be executed when that button is pressed.
Important — When you attach a custom control to a panel button, the association is with the
custom control button, and not the custom control. If you change which custom control is
assigned to the custom control button, that change is also applied to the attachment.
Operating Tip — Toggle Show Attach on the Attach Custom Controls Menu to On to
show the control panel button that you are attaching the custom control to.
3. Select the custom control that you want to attach to the selected button as follows:
Operating Tip — If you attach a custom control to a crosspoint button on the keyer bus, the
Show CC’s on Key Bus personality option allows you to have the name of the custom control
shown on the mnemonic for that button.
Operating Tip — You can delete all the attachments of custom controls to control panel
buttons by pressing Delete All Attachments on the Attach Custom Controls Menu.
Note — If the custom control that you want to change the name for is already running, the
Modify Name button is gray, and you cannot modify the name until the custom control has
stopped.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Custom Control Name Menu to enter a name, or set up the
mnemonics for the custom control button.
4. Enter the new name for the custom control bank in the New Name field. The name can
be no more than 8 characters in length.
5. Press Accept New Name to store the new name and mnemonic settings.
Important — You can only edit a custom control on the same panel it was recorded on, or a
panel with the exact same settings, including MLE assignments and bus maps.
Note — If you are editing a Relative Custom Control, <relative> appears next to the Bank and
Button identification, and the relative MLE level (R LVL) is displayed instead of the MLE
number.
Operating Tip — You can test a single event in a custom control by selecting the event you
want to test and pressing Run Single Event. You can use this feature to step through a custom
control to check for errors. Similarly, the Run From Here function allows you to run the custom
control from the currently selected event to the end.
Important — When you attach a custom control to a panel button, the association is with the
custom control button, and not the custom control. If you change which custom control is
assigned to the custom control button, that change is also applied to the attachment.
Important — Custom Control Shortcuts require the mnemonics option for the custom control
bus be installed.
Note — The Custom Control Shortcuts do not support the CC Soft Shot Box, the Custom
Control Shot Box, or the Auxiliary Control Panels.
Operating Tip — You can change the name of a custom control shortcut the same as you
change the bank name. Refer to the section “Naming Custom Control Banks and Shortcuts”
on page Eng 10-8 for more informaiton.
Operating Tip — You can view the contents of a transport custom control by selecting the
custom control button and pressing the View button on the Custom Controls Menu 1-2.
Operating Tip — Press Reset All on the Set Variables Menu to set all the variable to the
default value (0).
2. Use the Variable knob to select the variable that you want to set a value for. If you
change the value of a variable, all equations that use that variable will be changed.
3. Use the Frames and Seconds knobs to select the length of time that you want to the
variable set to. The number of frames for each second depends on the video format the
switcher is operating in.
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on finalizing the setup of the personality settings of your
switcher, as well as the color schemes use for the control panel.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Personality List
• Control Panel Button Color Schemes
• Mnemonic Color Schemes
• Control Panel Display Brightness
• Loading Color Schemes
• Lock/Unlock Personality
Note — Personality settings that can be set for an individual control panel must be set from the
control panel, or panel id, you want them to apply to.
Selecting a Color
Any of the glow or user colors for the buttons on the control panel can be adjusted.
Note — With some pre-loaded color schemes, or user created color schemes, the Item On
Color or On-Air colors may not be easily distinguishable from the Glow color. Make sure to test
a color scheme with each MLE and Aux before using it.
Panel Mnemonic Brightness and Contrast Settings — Color Scheme Menu 2-3
4. Adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the mnemonic display on the control panel as
follows:
• Use the Mnemonic Brightness knob to adjust the brightness of the mnemonics.
• Use the Mnemonic Contrast knob to adjust the contrast of the mnemonics.
5. Press Extern Mnemonic Bright/Contrast.
Operating Tip — Lower Display Brightness settings will prolong the life of the displays on
the control panel.
Operating Tip — If you do not want to use the selected color scheme, you can press Undo
Changes on the Load Color Scheme Menu to revert back to the previous color scheme.
Note — If the Lock/Unlock Personality feature is active, and a password has been set up, the
Enter Personality Password Menu is displayed. Enter the password in the New Name field
and press Accept New Name to display the Lock/Unlock Personality Menu.
Operating Tip — You can delete the current password by pressing Clear Password on the
Lock/Unlock Personality Menu.
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on finalizing the setup of the Vision switcher. This includes
setting up Aux Buses, including the installation of remote aux panels, recalling factory setting,
personality setup, and setting up the preview overlay.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Aux Bus Setup
• Default MLE Map Assignment
• Squeeze & Tease Mode
• Key 4 Mode
• Standard GPI Setup
• Clip Setup
• Audio Channel Setup
• Factory Default Settings
• Preview Overlay Setup
• Set System Time
• Auto Follow
• Frame Over-Temperature Shutdown
• Lock/Unlock Installation
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Aux Bus Names Menu to enter a name.
2. Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus you want to name.
3. Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field.
4. Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the Aux Bus.
Note — The Default MLE Map Assignment is only applied after a restart or ALL+ALL software
reset. Refer to the section “Resetting the Switcher” on page Eng 4-24 for more information on
performing a restart or software reset.
Note — Squeeze & Tease MD DVE channel resources are available to MLE-pairs. How many
DVE channel resources are available to each MLE-pair depends on the configuration of your
switcher. Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease” on page Eng 2-27 for more information on the
different configurations.
• Fixed — Select this option to have the Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources
locked to specific MLEs in the MLE-pair as follows (WARP resources are not
locked):
› Octane/QMD-X — MLEs 1-4 have 4 DVE channel resources locked to
them, and MLEs 5-8 have 2 DVE channel resources locked to them.
› QMD-X — Each MLE has 4 DVE channel resources locked to it.
› MD-X — Each MLE has 4 DVE channel resources locked to it.
› QMD — Each MLE has 2 DVE channel resources locked to it.
› MD — Each MLE has 4 DVE channel resources locked to it.
• Floating — Select this option to have the Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources
and WARP resources float across the MLE-pair as follows:
› Octane/QMD-X — MLEs 1-4 have access to all 8 DVE channel resources
provided by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board, and MLEs 5-8 have access
to 4 DVE channel resources, and both WARP resource.
› QMD-X — Each MLE-pair has access to all 8 DVE channel resources
provided by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board.
› MD-X — Each MLE-pair has access to all 8 DVE channel resources provided
by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board.
› QMD — Each MLE-pair has access to 4 DVE channel resources, and a single
WARP resource. For example, MLE 1 and MLE 2 share 4 DVE channel
resources and 1 WARP resource, and MLE 3 and MLE 4 share the remaining
4 DVE channel resources and 1 WARP resource.
Operating Tip — A GPI Output Worksheet and a GPI Input Worksheet are provided to
assist you in setting up your GPIs. Refer to the section “Standard GPI I/O Input Worksheets”
on page Eng 21-13 for a copy of the GPI Input worksheet. Refer to the section “Standard GPI
I/O Output Worksheets” on page Eng 21-14 for copy of the GPI Output worksheet.
GP I/O Port
CPU
LTC
2
10/100 10/100 USB
To connect to a specific GPI Input or GPI Output, locate the wire connected to the pin for the GPI
I/O you want to use (Table 12.1).
Note — The GPI Interface must be enabled in order to control the switcher using GPI Inputs.
Refer to the section “GPI Interface Control” on page Ops 11-2 for more information on turning
the GPI Interface on.
Operating Tip — A GPI triggered transition will only transition the selected Key or
Background buses on the target MLE. If you want to ensure that only a particular transition is
performed when the GPI signal is received, have a memory recalled before the transition.
• Use the GPI Input knob to select the GPI Input that you want to configure.
• Use the Function knob to select the function you want to assign to the selected
GPI Input. You can choose between the following:
› Off — Select this option to have the switcher perform no function when a
trigger signal is received by the selected GPI Input.
› Auto — Select this option to have an auto transition performed in the MLE,
MultiDSK key, or Fade to Black Module, that you select when a trigger signal
is received by the selected GPI Input.
› Cut — Select this option to have a cut performed in the MLE, MultiDSK key,
or Fade to Black Module, that you select when a trigger signal is received by
the selected GPI Input.
Operating Tip — If you have a custom control with a number of holds in it, the GPI Run
Custom Control trigger can be used to start the custom control, and continue it at each hold.
• Use the GPI Input knob to select the GPI Input that you want to configure.
• Use the Function knob to select the function you want to assign to the selected
GPI Input. You can choose between the following:
› Off — Select this option to have the switcher perform no function when a
trigger signal is received by the selected GPI Input.
› Cust Ctrl — Select this option to have the custom control you select run
when a trigger signal is received by the selected GPI Input.
Note — You can assign a tally to a GPI Input that is already assigned to an input source. The
switcher will not distinguish between a tally that is activated because of a GPI trigger, or
because the input source is on-air.
3. Use the GPI Input knob to select the GPI Input that you want to assign to the selected
tally. The tally remains on as long as the GPI I/O trigger remains on.
4. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
Trigger
Volts) level. The duration of the trigger is set with the Pulse Dur’n
knob. Duration
• Pulse High — Select this option to have the GPI Output send a
Duration
momentary high (+5 Volts) trigger and then return to the base low (0
Trigger
Volts) level. The duration of the trigger is set with the Pulse Dur’n
knob.
• Level Low — Select this option to have the GPI Output toggle from
the base high (+5 Volts) level to the low level (0 Volts). The GPI
Trigger
• Level High — Select this option to have the GPI Output toggle
from the base low (0 Volts) level to the high level (+5 Volts). The
Trigger
4. Use the Pulse Dur’n knob to select the duration of the trigger signal, in
frames, that you want to use.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Name Outputs Menu to enter a name for the GPI I/O.
2. Use the Output number knob to select the GPI Output you want to name.
3. Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field.
4. Press Accept New Name on to assign the new name to the GPI Output.
5. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Note — The switcher supports a maximum of 10,000 clips in the clip list from a video server. If
there are more than 10,000 clips on your video server, the switcher will only report 10,000.
In a MultiPanel configuration, only the Master Panel can access the VTR Clips Menus.
The VTR Clips Menu allows you to perform the following functions:
• Select a VTR or Video Server and a clip number.
• Grab or enter a timecode (and other device specific data), name the clip, and store it in a
clip register. Up to 300 clip registers can be stored (using registers 000 to 299).
• Cue and preview each clip.
• Modify the inpoint and outpoint of a clip.
Programming Clips
1. Press HOME Clips Assign Clips Clip Type.
Note — Only VDCP video servers support the looping of clips. If the clip is from a VTR or
Betacam video server, you cannot enable looping.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Clip Name Menu to enter a name for a clip.
• Enter the new name for the clip in the New Name field. The name can be no more
than 8 characters in length and cannot contain a leading or trailing space.
• Press Accept New Name to store the new name and display the VTR Clips
Menu 1-2.
4. Select a clip on the VTR or Video Server as follows:
• Press Choose ID.
Operating Tip — If you know the name of the clip, press Enter ID and enter the name of the
clip directly from the Enter Clip ID Menu. Only clip names up to 96 characters long are
supported.
Note — If you want to refresh the list of clips returned by the VTR or Video Server, press
Refresh & Choose ID to poll the device for a current list of clips. The total number of clips
returned is indicated under the Showing heading.
• Use the ×1, ×10, or ×100 knobs to select the clip on the VTR or Video Server that
you want to use. The ID and Duration of the currently selected clip is shown in the
respective fields.
5. Modify the Inpoint and Outpoint of the clip as follows:
• Press Inpoint/Outpoint.
Inpoint/Outpoint Menu
• Toggle Enable to enable the Inpoint/Outpoint overrides.
› No — Select this option to use the default inpoint and outpoint of the clip on
the VTR or Video Server. If you have made changes to the inpoint of outpoint
of the clip, these values are saved, but not applied to clip until you select Yes.
› Yes — Select this option to override the inpoint and outpoint of the clip on the
VTR or Video Server. When you select Yes, the Inpoint/Outpoint Menu
changes to allow you to modify the start and stop positions of the clip.
• Toggle Edit to select either the inpoint or outpoint for editing.
› In — Select this option to modify the inpoint, or start position, of the clip.
› Out — Select this option to modify the outpoint, or stop position, of the clip.
Operating Tip — You can cue the clip to the current Inpoint or Outpoint by pressing Cue to
Inpoint when Edit is set to In, or Cue to Outpoint when Edit is set to Out.
• Press Hours/Minutes.
Grabbing a Timecode
If you do not know the timecode for the inpoint or outpoint you want to store, you can manually
scan the video using the commands on the VTR Clips Menu 2-2 and grab the timecode.
1. Press HOME Clips Assign Clips.
2. Select the clip register and VTR or Video Server you want to store.
3. Grab a timecode as follows:
• Use the Audio Src knob to select the audio source you want to name.
• Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field. The name can be no
longer than eight characters.
• Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the audio source.
4. Press Assign All to send the audio input channel to audio source assignments to the
Audio Mixer.
5. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Note — If you have programmed Audio Assign Custom Controls, the Audio Channel knob
will display the custom control that you assigned the channel to.
• Use the Include knob to select Yes, to include the channel, or No, to not include
the channel. If the channel is not included, the switcher will not control the audio
levels for that channel.
Note — Assigning audio channels to groups does not alter the default or custom levels that
you have set for them.
Note — If you have programmed Audio Assign Custom Controls, the Audio Channel knobs
on the Audio Menu will display the custom control that you assigned the channel to.
• Use the Audio Channel 1 knob to select the first audio channel that you want to
assign to the group.
• Use the Audio Channel 2 knob to select the second audio channel that you want
to assign to the group.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Audio Channel Names Menu to enter a name for the audio
channel.
• Use the Channel Name knob to select the audio channel you want to name.
• Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field. The name can be no
longer than 14 characters.
• Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the audio channel.
Note — If the Audio Cut Only personality option is set to On, any audio fade rate settings are
ignored.
Operating Tip — Toggle Fade Rate to Video to set the selected channel back to the video
transition rate.
Note — If the Installation is locked, you cannot recall the factory default settings for Installation,
but all other registers will recall normally.
Important — You should back up any of your registers that you want to keep to a Setup
before performing the recall of the factory default setting. Refer to the section “Storing and
Recalling Files and Setups” on page Eng 13-4 for more information on storing registers to
switcher Setups.
Note — If Global-Store channel 4 is enabled, the Preview Overlay feature is not available.
Refer to the section “Personality List” on page Eng 11-2 for more information on Global-Store 4
Mode.
PREVIEW OVERLAY
SOURCE VTR SAFE TIME MASK HIDE
CENTER
ID TC TITLE CLOCK PV OVER
Figure 12.3 Vision Preview Overlay Module for all other switchers
Operating Tip — On the Vision 1, the Preview Overlay functions can be turned off and on
from the Preview Overlay Menus.
Source ID
The Source ID element shows the name of the current on-air video signal, the transition type that
is currently selected, and the video signal that is taken on-air with the next transition.
1. Press Source ID.
Safe Title
The Safe Title element shows guides for Safe Title, Safe Action and Minimum Text Size
(Figure 12.4) using the SMPTE standards. A number of pre-defined Safe ID setups are stored on
the switcher. The size and position of the elements for these Safe ID setups can be adjusted and
stored.
Safe Action
Safe Title
Minimum Text
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Change Safe Title Name Menu to enter a name.
Center
The Center element shows a crosshairs on the Preview Overlay to indicate the center of the
picture. The position of the crosshairs can be adjusted and stored.
1. Press Safe Title Center Pos.
Note — You must have Master set to On in order to be able to tie the operation of the Time
Clock to an MLE or Fade to Black transition.
Note — If there are NTP Servers listed on the Set System Time Menu, the switcher is getting
system time information from the listed NTP Servers. You cannot set the time manually when an
NTP Server is active.
Time Page
4. In the blank Time Servers field, enter the IP Address of the NTP server you want to
add. IP addresses in the range of 169.254.x.x are reserved by the switcher and cannot
be used as a time server address.
Operating Tip — To remove an NTP server from the list, click DELETE next to the time
server you want to remove.
5. Click ADD. You are asked to confirm the addition of the time server once it is validated,
click OK to add the server.
Once the switcher is synchronized to the new NTP server, Okay appears in the Status column. If
Okay is not shown next the IP address, check that the IP address is correct, or that the switcher
has access to the address.
Auto follow actions only echo commands, and do not echo the state. For example, if a transition
is performed on an MLE, the auto follow MLE also performs a transition, regardless of what is
currently on-air on that MLE. If Key 1 is on-air on MLE 1 but off-air on MLE 2, the transition
takes Key 1 off-air on MLE 1, but on-air on MLE 2.
The same is true for memory recalls. If a memory register contains different setting on each MLE,
the local settings will be used. Auto Recall for memories only ensures that the same memory
register is recalled on the Echo To MLE. For example, if memory register 09 is recalled on the
Echo From MLE, memory register 09 is also recalled on the Echo To MLE. These two memory
registers may contain different commands.
Operating Tip — When an Auto Follow is turned on, the word Active appears on the Main
Menu 1-2 next to the Auto Follow under the Remote Enables.
An auto follow can be set up for an entire MLE at once, or for the individual elements of an MLE.
Operating Tip — The currently active Auto Follows are listed on the Auto Follow Setup
Menu 2-2. Press Buses to view the bus follows, Keyers to view the keyer follows, Transitions
to view transition follows, and Mem Recalls to view memory recall follows.
2. Press Config.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected MLE auto follow by pressing Clear.
5. Press More.
6. Set up a Bus auto follow as follows:
• Press Buses.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Bus auto follow by pressing Clear
Bus Follow on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Bus auto follows by
pressing Clear All Bus Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Bus auto follow by pressing Clear
Keyer Follow on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Keyer auto follows
by pressing Clear All Keyer Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Transition auto follow by pressing
Clear Trans Follow on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Transition
auto follows by pressing Clear All Trans Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Memory auto follow by pressing Clear
All Mem Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Memory auto
follows by pressing Clear All Mem Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.
Note — If the Lock/Unlock Installation feature is active, and a password has been set up, the
Enter Installation Password Menu is displayed. Enter the password in the New Name field
and press Accept New Name to display the Lock/Unlock Installation Menu.
Operating Tip — You can delete the current password by pressing Clear Password on the
Lock/Unlock Installation Menu.
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on storing files and registers to the internal hard drive, a USB
drive, or directly to an external computer for backup.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• File Storage Overview
• Storing and Recalling Files and Setups
• Managing Setups with an External Computer
• Hard Drive Backup and Restore
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–1
File Storage Overview
The Vision switcher stores configuration and operation data in a number of registers that contain
the individual entries for items such as memories or personality settings. These registers can be
stored as a single archive file, as a register set that contains all the individual register of that type,
or as all individual registers. These files can be stored into Setups on the Hard Drive of the
switcher, or as files onto a USB flash drive. Setups allow you to store a complete set of switcher
files on the hard drive. Different Setups can be created for different shows or applications,
allowing you to quickly locate and recall the switcher configurations.
The following Register Types are present on the Vision switcher:
• Memory Registers — The memory registers contain all the memories that are stored on
the switcher. The memory registers can be stored and recalled as a set of all the memories
on the switcher, or as individual memory registers (0 to 99). Memory registers are stored
and recalled across all MLEs on the switcher, even if the same memory register contains
different settings for each MLE.
• Custom Control Registers — The custom control registers contain all the custom
controls that are stored on the switcher. The custom control registers can be stored and
recalled as a set of all the custom controls on the switcher, or as individual custom
controls. Custom control registers are stored and recalled by Bank and Custom Control. If
there are more or fewer custom control buttons on the switcher you are recalling the
custom control registers on, you may want to store and recall individual custom controls.
Custom Control Bank information is stored in the installation registers.
• Personality Registers — The personality registers contain all the user interface settings.
These registers contain items such as mnemonic settings, preview overlay positions and
settings, and transition rates. As a rule, anything that is set up from the Personality
Menus is stored in these registers. The following items are stored in the Personality
Registers:
› Personality settings
› Preview Overlay setting
› Default Mnemonics settings
› Pbus Memory settings
› Character Generator settings
› Memory Attributes
› Bus Map Assignment
• Clip Registers — The clip registers contain all the VTR and video server timecode and
clip information stored on the switcher.
• Installation Registers — The installation registers contain all the external device setup,
and software configurations settings for the switcher. As a rule, anything that is set up
from the Installation Menus is stored in this register. The following items are stored in
the installation registers:
› Input source settings (including tally and crosspoint button assignments)
› Output BNC settings
› Aux Bus settings
› GPI I/O settings
› Clean Feed settings
› Device communication settings
› Custom Control Bank settings (not including custom controls)
› Bus Maps
Eng 13–2 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Squeeze & Tease Registers — The Squeeze & Tease registers contain all the Squeeze &
Tease sequences that have been stored on the switcher.
• Bus Maps Registers — The Bus Map registers contain all the Bus Maps that have been
stored on the switcher.
• Shot Box Pages Registers — The Shot Box Pages registers contain all the Shot Box
Pages that have been stored on the switcher.
• Camera Registers — The Camera registers contain all the stored shots for cameras that
do not store shots on the camera or camera head controller. Refer to the Ross Video
External Device Setup Sheet for your camera for information on whether it uses the
Camera registers.
• CC/Macro Attachments — The Custom Control Attachments registers contain all the
mappings of custom controls that are attached to control panel buttons.
• MultiViewer Assignment — The MultiViewer Assignment registers contain all the
mapping of what layout is assigned to each MultiViewer.
• MultiViewer Layouts — The MultiViewer Layouts registers contain all the layouts and
assigned sources for the MultiViewer that have been stored on the switcher. The
assignment of a MultiViewer to output BNCs is stored in the Installation Register.
The Memory, Custom Control and Squeeze & Tease registers can all be stored as individual files
for each value on the switcher. This allows you to store a particular Memory, Custom Control, or
Squeeze & Tease sequence to a Setup on the Hard Drive, or to the USB flash drive, and recall it to
another register position on the same or a different switcher. For example, Custom Control Bank
3 Button 9 can be stored on the USB flash drive and then recalled into Bank 1 Button 3. This
allows you to organize these registers on a single switcher, or transfer only the registers you need
to another switcher.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–3
Storing and Recalling Files and Setups
The Vision switcher allows you to store and recall the various installation setting, custom
controls, memories, sequences, and bus maps to either the hard drive, or USB flash drive. This
can be to backup your settings, or to copy your settings from one switcher to another.
The Vision switcher can store files and setups on either the internal hard drive, located in the
frame, or a USB drive that is inserted into the USB port on the Fade To Black Module. The USB
drive must be formatted as FAT or NTFS.
Only the Master Panel can store or recall files or setups to either the internal hard drive, or a USB
flash drive.
Storing Registers
You can store your switcher settings and files either to the internal hard drive, or to an external
USB flash drive from the Master Panel.
1. Press Disk Dest/Source.
Important — Do not remove the USB flash drive from the control panel during a store or
recall. If the USB flash drive is removed during a store or recall, the panel may need to be
restarted to restore proper functionality.
3. Press Store.
Eng 13–4 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Disk Store Menus
4. Select the switcher registers that you want to store to the selected Setup, or USB flash
drive, as follows:
Note — If a is shown above a register type, then a switcher configuration file for that type is
already present on the storage device. Confirm that you want to overwrite this file, or select a
different Setup.
• All — Select this option to store all categories of registers to the storage device.
• Memories — Select this option to store only Memory Registers.
• Custom Controls —Select this option to store only Custom Control Registers.
• Personality — Select this option to store only Personality Registers.
• VTR Clips — Select this option to store only VTR Clip Registers.
• Installation — Select this option to store only Installation Registers.
• Press More to view the following options.
• S&T MD Sequences — Select this option to store only Squeeze & Tease
Sequences.
• Bus Maps — Select this option to store only Bus Map Registers.
• Shot Box Pages — Select this option to store only Custom Control Shot Box
Page Registers.
• Camera — Select this option to store only Camera Shot Registers.
• CC/Macro Attachments — Select this option to store only the custom control
attachments to control panel buttons.
• MultiViewer Assignment — Select this option to store only the MultiViewer
Assignment Registers.
• MultiViewer Layouts — Select this option to store only the MultiViewer Layout
Registers.
• CC Variables — Select this option to store only the CC Variables Register.
5. Press Name Setup.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Setup Name Menu to enter a name for a Setup.
6. Enter the new name for the Setup in the New Name field. The name can be no more than
8 characters in length.
7. Press Accept New Name on the Setup Names Menu to store the new name.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–5
Storing Individual Registers
When you store an individual register, the switcher allows you to select into which register that
entry is stored and recalled. For example, this allows you to store the memory in register 06, and
then recall it to Memory register 35. This can be useful for organizing your registers, or for
copying only select registers onto a new switcher.
1. Press Disk Dest/Source.
Eng 13–6 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
5. Store an individual Custom Control Register as follows:
• Press CustCtrl Register.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–7
Bus Maps — Store Individual Items Menu 1-2
• Use the From Switcher knob to select the bus map that you want to save.
• Use the To Disk knob to select the register on the storage device to save the file to.
• Press Store Item to store the bus map to the selected location.
8. Store an individual Shot Box Page as follows:
• Press Shot Box Pages.
Eng 13–8 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Use the From Switcher knob to select the MultiViewer layout that you want to
save.
• Use the To Disk knob to select the register on the storage device to save the file to.
• Press Store Item to store the MultiViewer layout to the selected location.
With your individual registers stored, you can recall them onto the same switcher in different
locations, or recall them onto a different switcher. Recalling your registers in different locations
on the same switcher allows you to organize your memories, sequences, or custom controls in a
different order.
Recalling Registers
When you recall switcher registers by type, the switcher extracts the individual register items
from the register type files and replaces the existing register entries with the new ones.
Important — A Recall cannot be undone. Ensure that you have Stored your current switcher
configuration before recalling a new Setup so that you can revert to the previous configuration if
needed.
Important — Do not remove the USB flash drive from the control panel during a store or
recall. If the USB flash drive is removed during a store or recall, the panel may need to be
restarted to restore proper functionality.
3. Press Recall.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–9
Disk Recall Menus
4. Select the switcher registers that you want to recall from the selected Setup or USB flash
drive as follows:
Note — If a is shown above a register type, then a switcher configuration file for that type is
already present on the storage device.
Note — If you recall an Installation register that has the Video Processor Board set differently
than it currently is (as a MultiViewer vs an MLE for example), the Video Processor will reboot on
the recall.
Eng 13–10 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Recalling Individual Registers
When you recall an individual register, the switcher allows you to select into which register that
entry is recalled. For example, this allows you to store the memory in register 06, and then recall
it to Memory register 35. This can be useful for organizing your registers, or for copying only
select registers onto a new switcher.
1. Press Disk Dest/Source.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–11
5. Recall an individual Custom Control Register as follows:
• Press CustCtrl Register.
Eng 13–12 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Bus Maps — Recall Individual Items Menu 1-2
• Use the From Disk knob to select the bus map on the storage device to recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the bus map that you want recall to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the bus map to the selected location.
8. Recall an individual Shot Box Pages as follows:
• Press Shot Box Pages.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–13
• Use the From Disk knob to select the MultiViewer layout on the storage device to
recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the MultiViewer layout that you want recall to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the MultiViewer layout to the selected location.
Eng 13–14 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Managing Setups with an External Computer
The web interface of the frame allows you to not only upgrade the software on the switcher, but
also to manage the Setups you have stored on the hard drive of the switcher. Using a computer on
the same sub-net of a network as the frame, you can browse to the frame, log in, and either
download or upload Setups from or to the frame.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–15
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is
displayed.
2. Enter your username and password as follows when the Login Dialog Box appears. The
default Name is user and Password is password.
3. Click File Sets to display the File Sets Page. All the populated Setups on the switcher
are shown in blue.
Operating Tip — You can use the Browse... button to display file browser dialog, and then
locate the file you want to upload.
Eng 13–16 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Hard Drive Backup and Restore
The content of the hard drive in the switcher can be backed up for archiving, or if you are
replacing the hard drive.
Note — The backup and restore should not be used as a method of copying setups between
switchers.
Keep the following in mind when working with the restore and backup feature:
• The backup requires a Linux-compatible USB storage device with at least 11GB of
available space.
• Backup and restore can only be performed from a Master Panel.
• All panels connected to the switcher during the backup will be unresponsive.
• Option codes and serial number are not stored with the backup.
• Only files that are different on the USB drive compared to the hard drive will be backed
up or restored.
Operating Tip — You can stop the backup at any time by pressing Abort Backup. The
backup can be started again from where it left off.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–17
To Restore the Switcher Hard Drive
1. Insert the USB storage device that you want to perform the restore from into the USB
port on the control panel.
2. Press Disk More System Restore.
Eng 13–18 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Auxiliary Panels
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on setting up an Auxiliary Control Panel or a Remote Aux
Panel with the Vision switcher.
The following topics are discussed:
• Auxiliary Panel Overview
• Installing Auxiliary Panels
• Communications Connections
• Communications Setup
• Auxiliary Panel GPIs
Note — An Auxiliary Control Panel that does not match the size of your control panel can be
used; however, a different bus map will have to be assigned to the Auxiliary Control Panel to
properly map all the crosspoint buttons.
1
BANK BANK BANK BANK BANK BANK
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BLCK
MLE MLE MLE CLEAN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
1 2 3
1. Power Connector
A single DC power connector is provided for the +5 VDC power supply. An AC Adapter (90-264
VAC) is provided with each Remote Aux Panel to provide the +5 VDC power for the panel.
2. GPI Connector
A single DB9 GPI connector is provided for special GPI triggers that allows a camera operator to
manually override the Aux panel selection.
3. Main Connector
A single RJ-12 connector is provided for connecting the Remote Aux Panel to the External Link
port on the back of the control panel.
Note — For information on installing and cabling your Auxiliary Control Panel, refer to the
documentation that came with your Auxiliary Control Panel.
Caution — Always connect the External Power Supply to the Remote Aux Panel before
connecting the AC mains power. Connecting the power supply to the AC mains power before
connecting to the Remote Aux Panel could damage the Remote Aux Panel.
4. Connect the AC Adapter to the Power port on the Aux Panel and to the appropriate
AC outlet.
Note — External Link Port 1 must be used to connect to the Touchscreen display, and
External Link Port 2 is used to connect to the OverDrive Production Control System. If
OverDrive is set up on any Vision control panel connected to the switcher, External Link Port 2
cannot be used for Remote Aux Panels.
To OverDrive or
To Touchscreen
Remote Aux
2. Connect and secure one of the RJ-12 ends of the Aux Cable to the RJ-12 end of the
Remote Aux Panel Cable Adapter.
3. Connect and secure the other RJ-12 end of the Aux Cable to the MAIN port on the back
of the Remote Aux Panel.
4. Connect and secure one end of the Aux Cable to the ECHO port on the back of the
Remote Aux Panel.
5. Connect and secure the other end of the Aux Cable to the MAIN port on the back of the
second Remote Aux Panel.
You can connect up to 8 Remote Aux Panels to a single Aux Port on the switcher.
Note — Ross Video provides a Remote Aux Panel Cable Adapter (#4800CR-370) that plugs
into the RJ-45 External Link ports and provides an RJ-12 Remote Aux port for a standard aux
cable.
Cable connection in the following table (Table 14.1) refer only to those between the Vision
switcher and the Remote Aux Panel. Refer to the section “Remote Aux Panel Pinouts” on page
Eng 20-27 for information on other cable connections present on the Remote Aux Panel.
Note — Only Auxiliary Control Panels assigned to Internal Panel Rows can be used for menu
auto follows, double press actions, or recording custom controls.
Note — All the Remote Aux Panels that are connected to the selected External Link port, or to
other Remote Aux Panels that are connected to the port, are restricted to Aux Buses in the
range you select.
BLACK
MLE MLE MLE CLEAN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
On-Air
Indicator
BLACK
MLE MLE MLE CLEAN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
7. Each aux panel can be assigned to all the available aux buses. The aux panel can be set
up for each aux bus in one of three modes. Press the Aux Bus Output buttons on the
Remote Aux Panel repeatedly until the required mode is selected for the aux bus. You
can choose between the following:
• Regular — The aux panel is assigned to the selected aux bus, allowing full control.
The button is lit steadily.
• Follow — The aux panel is assigned to the selected aux bus, allowing you to view
what crosspoints are selected on that aux bus, but you cannot control the aux bus.
The button is flashing.
8. Press Accept on the Remote Panel Setup Menu to store the new settings and exit
programming mode.
Custctrl & GPI Group (Auxiliary Control Panel Module) — Panel Modules Menu
4. Use the GPI Group knob to select the GPI group that you want to assign to the
Auxiliary Control Panel.
BLACK
MLE MLE MLE CLEAN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
5. Select the GPI Group you want to assign to the Remote Aux Panel, by selecting the
appropriate crosspoint button (offset). Only one GPI Group can be assigned to a Remote
Aux Panel at a time.
• GPIs 1-8 — Select GPI Group 1 (Offset 0) to assign these GPIs.
• GPIs 9-16 — Select GPI Group 2 (Offset 1) to assign these GPIs.
• GPIs 17-24 — Select GPI Group 3 (Offset 2) to assign these GPIs.
• GPIs 25-32 — Select GPI Group 4 (Offset 3) to assign these GPIs.
• GPIs 33-40 — Select GPI Group 5 (Offset 4) to assign these GPIs.
• GPIs 41-48 — Select GPI Group 6 (Offset 5) to assign these GPIs.
• GPIs 49-56 — Select GPI Group 7 (Offset 6) to assign these GPIs.
• GPIs 57-64 — Select GPI Group 8 (Offset 7) to assign these GPIs.
6. Test the GPIs on the Remote Aux Panel as follows:
BLACK
MLE MLE MLE CLEAN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
7. Press Accept to store the new settings and exit programming mode.
8. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
This completes the procedure for programming a Remote Aux Panel GPI. Once the GPIs have
been set up, you will have to set up the CCU Joystick controls.
Operating Tip — The Remote Panel Setup Menu shows which Auxiliary Panel GPIs are
currently closed. You can update the list by pressing the Inquire GPIs button.
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on setting up a Custom Control Shot Box Module or Audio
Fader Module with the Vision switcher.
The following topics are discussed:
• Custom Control Shot Box Module
• Audio Control Module
The active Shot Box Page is indicated in reverse text on the mnemonic button. The currently
running custom control is indicated by the mnemonic text flashing between reverse text and
normal, and the previously run custom control is shown in a different color, depending on the set
color (if the normal color is green, the previously run custom control is shown in yellow). To
avoid confusion, choose fonts and colors so the page buttons look different from the custom
control buttons, and so you can tell the active page button from the other page buttons (its font is
reversed between normal and inverted).
Note — If more than one Shot Box Module is assigned to the same panel row, both modules
will mirror each other. You cannot have two Shot Box Modules operate independently if they are
assigned to the same panel row.
Shot Box Pages can be assigned to control buttons on the Auxiliary Control Panel when it is in
Aux Bus mode.
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Page Name Menu to enter a name, or set up the mnemonics for
the custom control button.
4. Enter the new name for the page in the New Name field. The name can be no more than
8 characters in length.
5. Press Accept New Name to store the new name and mnemonic settings.
AUDIO CONTROL
When an audio channel, or group, is assigned to a slider, the source name for that audio channel is
shown in the mnemonic above the audio fader. Audio channels, or groups, can be dynamically
assigned to audio faders with a custom control.
The color of the mnemonic above each audio fader indicates the state of the audio channel, or
group, assigned to the fader.
• Orange — Indicates that a channel assigned to that fader is on-air.
• Yellow — Indicates that all channels assigned to that fader are off-air.
To set up the Audio Control Module, you must first assign each Audio Control Module to a panel
row. Once the Audio Control Module is assigned to a panel row you can assign audio channels to
the audio faders.
In This Chapter
This chapter provides instructions for connecting, and setting up an Up/Down Converter with
your Vision switcher. Before you begin, ensure that the SmartConversion™ option is installed.
If not, please contact Ross Video for details. Refer to the section “Installed Options” on page
Eng 6-9 for instructions on verifying the status of installed options.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Setting Up a Conversion Loop
• Switcher Setup
Operating Tip — A Conversion Loop Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track
of which inputs and outputs have been assigned to the Up/Down Converters. Refer to the
section “Conversion Loop Worksheets” on page Eng 21-20 for a copy of this worksheet.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters • Eng 16–1
Setting Up a Conversion Loop
Each conversion loop has an Output BNC that goes to the Up/Down Converter and an input
source that comes from the Up/Down Converter. Along with the input and output BNCs, each
conversion loop is assigned an input and output video format. This allows SmartConversion to
route video signal that need to be converted to the proper Up/Down Converters.
Note — Up/Down Converters can only be used on a single video signal at a time. You should
plan ahead to ensure that you will have enough Up/Down Converters of each video format for all
the video signals you will want on-air at any one time. This includes video signals that are being
transitioned off-air.
A conversion loop ties an Aux Bus output and an input source together so that when
SmartConversion sends a video signal out to an Up/Down Converter, it knows on which input
source the converted video signal is returned on.
Note — If you want the video selections for the Aux Buses that you are using for Up/Down
Converters to be stored in memories, you must enable Aux Bus in the memory. Refer to the
section “MLE Memory Attributes” on page Ops 9-10 for more information on using this feature.
1. Ensure that the Output BNCs that you want to use for your Up/Down Converter have
been set up as Aux Bus outputs. Refer to the section “Configuring Video Outputs” on
page Eng 8-2 for information on assigning an Aux Bus to an Output BNC.
2. Press HOME Setup Installation Aux Bus.
3. Press Ext Device Assign.
4. Assign Input and Output BNCs to a particular Up/Down Converter as follows:
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus Output BNC that is connected to the
input of your Up/Down Converter. This is the video signal that needs to be
converted. The Aux Bus name and number is used to identify the conversion loop
on the switcher.
• Use the Input knob to select the input source that is connected to the output of your
Up/Down Converter. This is the video signal that has been converted.
• Use the Tally when knob to select XPT On Air. This allows the switcher to
identify when a video signal is going on-air, and needs to be converted.
5. Press SmartConversion Aux To Converters.
Eng 16–2 • SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus Output BNC that is connected to the
input of your Up/Down Converter.
• Use the Used for Converter knob to toggle the conversion loop on or off.
› Yes — Select this option to activate the selected conversion loop.
SmartConversion will now be able to use this Up/Down Converter. Once
activated, you will have to set the input and output video formats for each
Up/Down Converter. Refer to the section “Assigning Buses to Use
SmartConversion” on page Eng 16-5 for more information on assigning
video formats to an Up/Down Converter.
› No — Select this option to not activate the selected conversion loop.
SmartConversion will not use this Up/Down Converter.
7. Set the delay for a particular Up/Down Converter as follows:
• Use the Delay knob to select the amount of time that is required for the Up/Down
Converter to convert the video signal and send it back to the switcher. Refer to your
Up/Down Converter documentation for specific delay values.
8. Press Converter Format
Note — The Converter Output Format does not change the video format of the input source
used by the conversion loop. When the conversion loop is activated, the video format of the
input source is overridden by the Converter Output Format. Refer to the section “Assigning
Input Source Types” on page Eng 7-4 for more information on setting up input sources.
• Use the Output Format knob to select the video format that the Up/Down
Converter is converting the input video signal to. This is the output video signal of
the Up/Down Converter.
10. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters • Eng 16–3
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Next you must set up how the switcher will use the converters, and on which buses.
Eng 16–4 • SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Switcher Setup
You can specify which MLEs and video feeds that SmartConversion is used on. This allows you
to turn SmartConversion on or off for Specific MLE video feeds or lock a specific conversion
loop to an MLE or key. The display on the Fade to Black Module can be used to show the number
of conversion loops that are still available.
Note — If you have disabled Keyer 4 to activate Utility Bus 1 and 2, Key 4V and Key 4A will be
replaced with U1 and U2.
• MLEX Utility1 — Select this option to select whether the Utility 1 bus on the
selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents the number of the
MLE.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters • Eng 16–5
• MLE X Utility2 — Select this option to select whether the Utility 2 bus on the
selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents the number of the
MLE.
• MLEX DSKY Video — Select this option to select whether the MultiDSK Key
Video Signal on the program MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents
the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
• MLEX DSKY Alpha — Select this option to select whether the MultiDSK Key
Alpha Signal on the program MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X”
represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
• MLEX KY BackV — Select this option to select whether the Key Y Backside
Video Signal for the selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents
the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
• MLEX KY BackA — Select this option to select whether the Key 1 Backside
Alpha Signal for the selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents
the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
• Aux Buses — Select this option to select whether a particular Aux Bus can use
SmartConversion. Aux Buses assigned to a conversion loop will not appear in the
list.
Note — If an Aux Bus is assigned to an AuxKey, it is set to Conversion Enabled by default, all
other Aux Buses are set to Conversion Disabled by default.
Eng 16–6 • SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
1. Press HOME Setup Installation Aux Bus SmartConversion
Converter Locking.
Note — If you are locking a conversion loop to the BKGD+PST bus pair, you should lock 2
conversion loops to the bus pair. One conversion loop for each bus.
• MLE X KEY Y — Select this option to lock the conversion loop to the Key bus of
the selected MLE, where “X” represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the
number of the keyer.
• Aux Buses — Select this option to lock the conversion loop to an Aux Bus.
4. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters • Eng 16–7
FTB Display — Personality Menu 1-2
3. Use the Value knob to toggle between SmrtConv or FTB.
• SmrtConv — Select this option to have the display on the Fade to Black Module
show the number of available up/down converters for SmartConversion to use.
• FTB — Select this option to have the display on the Fade to Black Module show the
transition rate for a Fade to Black transition.
Eng 16–8 • SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Switcher Calibration and
Diagnostics
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on performing calibration and diagnostic tests on your Vision
switcher.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Switcher Software Version
• Switcher Calibration
• Mapping a Module to a Row
• Fail Indicators Diagnosis
• Communication Status and Errors
• Non-Sync Status
• Control Panel Diagnostic Tools
• Frame Diagnostic Tools
• VNC Viewer
• Video Checksum Custom Controls
• Communication Port Monitor
• Switcher Logs
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–1
Switcher Software Version
The Version Information shows the version number and date of the software that is currently
running on the control panel and frame. Other information that is provided on this menu are the
IP address of the control panel and frame, and size of the Global-Store on the frame.
• Press HOME Status Version Info.
Eng 17–2 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Switcher Calibration
Calibration allows you to reset the limits of the faders on the control panel, re-center the
positioner with X, Y and Z limits, and align the touchscreen display.
Calibration can also be used to have the LEDs in the buttons of the control panel display in a
calibrated, or uncalibrated mode. When the control panel is manufactured, the LEDs for each
button are calibrated to a single standard so that all the buttons appear as a consistent color. This
color offset is stored in each module.
1. Press HOME Setup Installation More Calibration.
Calibration Menu
2. Use the LED Calibration knob to turn LED calibration on or off.
• No — Select this option to not have the LEDs light as normal.
• Yes — Select this option to have the LEDs light in an uncalibrated state. Any
calibration color offsets are ignored.
3. Press ADC Calibration.
Operating Tip — For more information on the Node and Link values for the module you are
calibrating, refer to the section “Module Control Link Backbone” on page Eng 20-9.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–3
5. Calibrate the Positioner as follows:
• Move the positioner forwards and backwards along the Y-axis to calibrate the Y
limits of the positioner.
• Move the positioner left and right along the X-axis to calibrate the X limits of the
positioner.
• Twist the positioner clockwise and counter-clockwise to calibrate the Z limits of the
positioner.
6. Press Accept to accept the new calibration limits.
7. Calibrate the Touchscreen as follows:
• Press Touch Screen Calibration. The calibration screen is displayed.
• Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note — If you have the V-100B TouchScreen, you must restart the control panel to apply the
new calibration values.
Eng 17–4 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Mapping a Module to a Row
Control Panel Mapping allows you to assign modules to Panel Rows, or control panel rows. This
is used to assign a newly installed module to a row of modules on the control panel, or to assign
an Auxiliary Control Panel to the switcher.
You can install a single module, or multiple at the same time, depending on how you want to
install the modules.
Important — Do not use the Remove Unfound Module Cfgs button on the Panel Modules
Menu unless instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–5
Panel Module Quick Configure Menu
3. Select the panel row that you want to start assigning modules to as follows:
• Select the type of panel row you want to program. You can choose between the
following:
› Internal Rows — Select this option to program a row on the Vision control
panel. You can choose between Row 1 and Row 8.
› External Rows — Select this option to program a row on an Auxiliary
Control Panel, or other external module, not including the Touchscreen
Display. You can choose between Row 1 and Row 16.
4. Press any button on the panel row module that you want to map buttons starting at 1 to.
All the buttons on the module will light up.
5. Press any button on the next panel row module that you want to map the next set of
buttons to. All the buttons on this module will light up.
6. Continue selecting modules until all the Crosspoint Modules and control modules,
including the Transition Module and Memory Module, that you want to assign to the
row, have been selected.
7. Configure additional rows as needed.
8. Press Exit to exit the menu.
Important — Do not use the Remove Unfound Module Cfgs button on the Panel Modules
Menu unless instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
2. Use the Link/Node knob to select the link and node that the module you want to assign
to a row is installed on. You can also press a button on the module to jump to the link
and node.
Eng 17–6 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Panel Row & Crosspoint — Panel Modules Menu
3. Press Panel Row & Crosspoint.
4. Use the Panel Row knob to select the panel row that you want to assign the module to.
You can select either an internal row (Row 1 to Row 8), or an external row (Row 1 to
Row 16).
5. Use the First Crosspoint knob to select the number of the first crosspoint button on
the module you are setting up. Each Crosspoint Module has 8 buttons, so the first button
on module 1 is 1, the first button on module 2 is 9. If the module does not have
crosspoint buttons, this knob is gray.
Note — If you are programming an Auxiliary Control Panel, the modules have 16 buttons.
Custctrl & GPI Group (Custom Control Module) — Panel Modules Menu
Operating Tip — The Custom Control module number will follow the numbering of the
Crosspoint modules by default.
• Use the First Custctrl knob to select the number of the first custom control button
on the module you are setting up. Each custom control module has 8 buttons, so the
first button on module 1 is 1, the first button on module 2 is 9. If the module does
not have custom control buttons, this knob is gray.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–7
7. Set up an Audio Control module as follows:
• Use the Link/Node knob to select the link and node that the module you want to
assign to a row is installed on. You can also press a button on the module to jump to
the link and node.
• Press Audiofader.
Eng 17–8 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
External Row Names Menu
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the External Row Names Menu to enter a name.
4. Enter the new name for the external row in the New Name field. The name can be no
more than 8 characters in length.
5. Press Accept New Name to store the new name.
6. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–9
Fail Indicators Diagnosis
The touchscreen display has two fail indicators (Figure 17.1) that are used to identify a possible
problem with either a power supply or fan in either the control panel or frame.
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE
When either of these indicators is lit, the switcher has detected a possible problem with either the
frame or control panel. With either of these fail indicators, pressing the lit indicator displays the
Status Menus.
Complete Status
The Complete Status shows the current operational status of the fans and power supplies in the
frame and control panel, as well as the temperature and communications status of the panel.
1. Press HOME Status Complete Status.
Eng 17–10 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Warnings
The Warnings list shows all the warnings or errors that have been generated by the switcher. This
can include fan or power supply failures, or communications problems.
1. Press HOME Status Warnings.
Note — If a board, card, or power supply is not present in the system, it is not shown on the
list.
• 1080p29.97 Video Mode — This item lists any boards in the frame that are not
compatible with the 1080p 29.97Hz video format when this video format is selected.
• 3G Video Mode — This item lists any boards in the frame that are not compatible with
the 1080p 59.94Hz and 1080p 50Hz video formats when one of these video formats is
selected.
• Driver Status — This item indicates the status of the FlexDevice drivers that are
currently installed on the switcher. A driver can be OK, Obsolete, or Unsupported. Refer
to the section “Installing and Managing FlexDevice Drivers” on page Eng 9-4 for
information on managing drivers.
• Frame Fans — This item indicates whether the cooling fans in the frame are operating
normally, or that a number of fans have failed. Refer to the section “Frame Fan Failure”
on page Eng 18-8 for more information on replacing a fan.
• Frame Graphics Buffer FPGA Temperature — This item indicates whether the
graphics buffer FPGA is operating in the normal temperature range.
• Frame Power Supplies — This item indicates whether there are enough power
supplies in the frame, that they are operating normally, or that one, or more, of them has
failed. If the status for the power supply is “Temperature not available”, the temperature
sensor in the power supply is not functioning normally. Refer to the section “Frame
Power Supply Failure” on page Eng 18-6 for more information on replacing a power
supply.
• Frame Power Supply Fans — This item indicates whether the fans in the frame
power supplies are operating normally.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–11
• Frame Present — This item indicates whether a frame has been detected and is
communicating with the Vision control panel. If the message, Unsupported frame
board configuration. is displayed, one or more of the boards in the frame is in the
wrong slot. Refer to the section “Removing and Installing Frame Boards” on page Eng
4-18 for information on the supported board locations for your frame.
• Hard Drive Status — This item indicates whether the hard drive on the frame CPU
Board is reporting any Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology
(S.M.A.R.T.) warnings or has experiences a complete failure. If a warning or failure is
displayed, contact Ross Video Technical Support for information on diagnosing the
warning or replacing your hard drive.
• Panel and Frame Software Versions — This item indicates if the software version
on the control panel is not the same as the software version on the frame. An upgrade
must to be performed so that both the frame and the control panel are on the same
software version. Refer to the section “Software Upgrade” on page Eng 6-3 for more
information on performing a software upgrade.
• Panel Fans — This item indicates whether the cooling fans in the control panel are
operating normally, or that one, or more, of them has failed. The Power Supply Modules
that contain the cooling fans are closed units and not field serviceable. If a fan needs to be
replaced, the entire module is replaced. Refer to the section “Control Panel Power
Supply Failure” on page Eng 18-2 for more information on replacing a fan.
• Panel Module Discovery — This item indicates whether or not all the modules on the
control panel have been successfully discovered and set up. If a module is not properly
set up, or is not present, a warning is displayed. Refer to the section “Replacing a
Control Panel Module” on page Eng 18-21 for more information on setting up a control
panel module.
• Panel OS Version — This item indicates what the current version of the Operating
System running on the control panel CPU Module is and if it is up to date.
• Panel PCH Temperature — This item indicates whether the Panel Communications
Hub is operating in a safe temperature range.
• Panel Power Supplies — This item indicates whether the power supplies in the
Vision control panel are operating normally, or that one, or more, of them has failed.
Refer to the section “Control Panel Power Supply” on page Eng 18-10 for more
information on replacing a power supply.
• PMC Status — This item indicates whether Panel Module Controller are running the
current version of software. Refer to the section “Upgrading PMCs” on page Eng 18-23
for information on updating the software on a PMC.
• Reference — This item indicates whether the current input reference format is properly
locked.
• SBC CPU Temperature — This item indicates whether the CPU in the Control Panel
CPU Module is operating in the normal temperature range.
• SBC Motherboard Temperature — This item indicates whether the motherboard in
the Control Panel CPU Module is operating in the normal temperature range.
• Stuck Buttons — This item indicates whether there are any stuck buttons on the Vision
control panel. Refer to the section “Stuck Button Test” on page Eng 17-19 for more
information on stuck buttons.
• Vid Card Temperatures — This item indicates whether the Video Processor Board in
the frame is operating in the normal temperature range.
Status Icons
There are 3 types of status icons that indicate the current status of each component or condition
that the switcher is monitoring. These icons are as follows:
Eng 17–12 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Good — This icon indicates that a component or condition is operating
properly.
• Warning — This icon indicates that a condition is outside of the normal
operating parameters. For example, the temperature inside the panel may be
slightly above or below the safe operating temperature.
• Failure — This icon indicates a major problem with a component or
condition that the switcher is monitoring. For example, the temperature inside
the control panel could be dangerously above or below the safe operating
temperature. The fail icon will also indicate control panel modules that are not
properly assigned to MLEs.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–13
Communication Status and Errors
The Vision switcher provides a number of status and error detection menus that allow you to
troubleshoot and diagnose communication problems.
Operating Tip — You can reset the error count by pressing the Reset Count button on the
TxRx Errors Menu. This will clear all the error counters on the control panel and frame.
Eng 17–14 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
2. Use the Panel knob to select the serial communications port on the control panel that
you want to view the errors for. You can choose between the following:
• Total Errors — Select this option to view the total number of errors for all the
serial communication ports on the control panel.
• AUXPAN X (AX) — Select this option to view the errors for the selected Auxiliary
serial communications port, where X represents the number of the port.
• REMOTE X (RX) — Select this option to view the errors for the selected Remote
serial communications port, where X represents the number of the port.
3. Use the Frame knob to select the serial communications port on the frame that you
want to view the errors for. You can choose between the following:
• Total Errors — Select this option to view the total number of errors for all the
serial communication ports on the frame.
• FRM2PAN (FP) — Select this option to view the errors for the PANEL port.
• PERIPH X (PX) — Select this option to view the errors for the selected Peripheral
serial communications port, where X represents the number of the port.
If you want more information on the serial communication errors that have occurred, you can
view the error statistics.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–15
Non-Sync Status
The Non-Sync Status Menu allows you to check if a video signal selected on a crosspoint bus, or
the video outputs of the switcher, is synchronized with the switcher reference format. The
Non-Sync indicators serve as a warning only, indicating that the timing of the input should be
fixed at the source. If the source is non-synchronous with the switcher reference format, cuts,
dissolves and other effects can still be performed, but the source is shifted vertically.
If a non-synchronous source is selected on a crosspoint bus, and the non-sync detection feature is
turned on, the crosspoint button flashes, indicating that the source is mis-timed.
1. Press HOME Status Non-Sync Status MLEs.
Eng 17–16 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Yellow — A yellow indicator shows that the video being output on the
corresponding BNC is not synchronized with the switcher reference.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–17
Control Panel Diagnostic Tools
The Vision control panel supports a number of diagnostic tests that can be used to identify issues
with your switcher.
These tests are designed to be used by Ross Video Technical Support and other qualified Ross
Video personnel.
The control panel diagnostic tests are grouped into the following categories:
• Module Tests
• Panel Communications Hub Tests
• Control Panel SBC Test
• Touchscreen Tests
• Burn Mode
Module Tests
The Module Tests allow you to test the functionality of the knobs, buttons, faders, and positioner
of the switcher, as well as test the color of the buttons. Additional tests are provided for the
control panel displays and the memory for each module.
Eng 17–18 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Button Test Information — Device Test Menu
4. Confirm that the button you pressed is shown on the menu.
5. Double-press Exit on the Device Test Menu to stop the test.
Fader Test
The fader test allows you to test the functionality of the faders on the control panel. This test
requires you to move the fader that you want to test from one limit to the other. The switcher
reports where that fader is, and whether the fader has been moved from one limit to the other.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Module Test.
2. Press Device Test.
3. Move the fader that you want to test. The Fader Test is displayed with an illustration of
the fader, and the transition indicators on the Transition Module light. The module and
hardware location of the fader are also be displayed on the menu.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–19
Fader Test — Device Test Menu
4. Confirm that the fader you moved is shown on the menu.
5. Double-press Exit to stop the test.
Positioner Test
The positioner test allows you to test the functionality of the positioner on the control panel. This
test requires you to move the positioner left and right, as well as twist it. The switcher reports
where that positioner is, and how it is being moved.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Module Test.
2. Press Device Test.
3. Move the positioner forward and backward to display the Positioner Test. An
illustration of the positioner appears on the menu. As you move the positioner, the Y
value for the positioner is displayed on the menu.
Eng 17–20 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Module Test.
2. Press Display Test to enter Display Test Mode.
3. Confirm that all displays and mnemonics are changing at the same time, and that the
colors and brightness are consistent.
Knob Test
The knob test allows you to test the functionality of the knobs on the touchscreen display of the
control panel. The Vision control panel supports either haptic knobs, with force feedback on the
knob, or optical knobs, without feedback on the knob.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Module Test.
2. Press Knob Test. In the center of the menu is a position graph for the knob. As you
rotate the knob, the slider moves along the position graph.
Note — If your Vision control panel uses optical knobs, only the Change Only button is
available. All other knob tests are unavailable.
Operating Tip — Select Change Only on the Knob Test Menu to show only the changes in
the knob position. Any range or boundary information is ignored. Select Wrap in Range on the
Knob Test Menu to show the range for the knob. When the knob reaches the end of the range,
it wraps around on the position graph.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–21
Module Memory Test
The module memory test allows you to test the integrity of the button and mnemonic memory
used in a module.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Module Test.
2. Press Memory Test. The switcher tests each module on the control panel, including the
touchscreen display, and report any errors on the menu.
This completes the procedure for performing a module memory test.
Eng 17–22 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
These do not include the ports on the Control Panel CPU. Refer to the section “Control Panel
SBC Test” on page Eng 17-25 for more information on testing the Control Panel CPU ports.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics PCH Test.
2. Press TX/RX Test.
Operating Tip — If you want to monitor the communications on one of the communications
ports, you can select Monitor on the Panel CPU TX/RX Test Menu to view the communications
on that port. Refer to the section “Communication Port Monitor” on page Eng 17-36 for more
information on using the Communications Port Monitor.
5. Use the Mode knob to select the transmission standard you want to use to test the
selected port. You can choose between the following:
Note — The External Link port on the Vision control panel only support the RS-422
(TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard.
• RS-422 — Select this option to test the selected serial communications port using
the RS-244 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard.
• RS-422 Null — Select this option to test the selected serial communications port
using the RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard. This option changes the
signals on the pinouts of the port for use with a null modem cable.
• RS-232 — Select this option to test the selected serial communications port using
the RS-232 (TIA/EIA-232) transmission standard.
6. Press Test to run the test on the selected serial communications port. The outcome of
the test is reported on the menu as Passed or Failed.
LVDS Test
The Low Voltage Differential Signalling (LVDS) test allows you to test the various
communications between the Panel Communications Hub (PCH) and all the Panel Module
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–23
Controllers (PMC) installed on the switcher. This test includes both internal and external
modules.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics PCH Test.
2. Press LVDS Test.
3. Test the internal LVDS links as follows:
• Toggle LVDS Links to Intern display the Internal LVDS Test. The switcher tests
the integrity of all the communications connections between the PCH and each
PMC.
Eng 17–24 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Tally Test
The tally test allows you to test the standard parallel tally system of the switcher. A Tally Test
Box is required to ensure that the tally relays are operating properly. The number of tallies you
have available to test depends on whether you have the Extended Tallies option installed.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics PCH Test.
2. Press Tally Test.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–25
SBC TX/RX Test Menu
3. Connect a loopback adapter to the port that you want to test.
4. Use the Com Port knob to select the serial communications port on the control panel
you want to test. You can choose between the following:
• Com 1 — Select this option to test the Serial 1 port on the control panel.
• Com 2 — Select this option to test the Serial 2 port on the control panel.
• Parallel — Select this option to test the Parallel 1 port on the control panel.
5. Press Test to run the test on the selected communications port.
The outcome of the test is reported on the menu as Passed or Failed.
Touchscreen Tests
The Touchscreen tests allow you to test the functionality and performance of the touchscreen
display. These tests include how well the touchscreen displays content, and if the touch sensor is
properly calibrated.
Pattern Test
The pattern test allows you to visually check the performance of the touchscreen as it cycles
through a number of patterns and colors.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Touch Screen.
2. Press Test Pattern. The touchscreen cycles through a number of test patterns of
different colors.
3. Confirm that the touchscreen is displaying the pattern correctly, and that the colors and
brightness are consistent.
4. Tap the touchscreen anywhere to stop the test.
Draw Test
The Draw Test allows you to visually check the functionality of the touchscreen by having it
feedback the location of where you touch with an X on the screen.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Touch Screen.
2. Press Draw Test. The touchscreen goes blank for the duration of the test.
3. Tap the touchscreen to test it. A red X will appear where you start. Trace the yellow line
from the red X to the blue O.
4. Press Quit, or press Esc on the keyboard, to stop the test.
Eng 17–26 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Burn Mode
The burn mode performs a number of tests on the control panel to ensure that all internal memory
and communications ports are operating properly. To ensure that all external communications
ports are operating properly, a loopback adapter must be installed on each port.
1. Press HOME Setup Panel Diagnostics Burn Mode.
Operating Tip — The View Summary and View Log options allow you to view the outcome
of the test on the menu. The Log can then be saved to a USB flash drive by pressing Save Log
to USB.
3. Press Start Test to start the test. The switcher cycles through the LED tests, Display
and Mnemonics tests, LVDS tests, Memory tests, and all the Tx/Rx tests for the control
panel. The tests continues until stopped.
4. Press Stop Test to stop the test.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–27
Frame Diagnostic Tools
The QMD/X and MD/X frames support a number of diagnostic tests that can be used to identify
issues with your switcher. Some tests require a loopback adapter, or other external device, to
confirm the diagnostics outcome.
These tests are designed to be used by Ross Video Technical Support and other qualified Ross
Video personnel.
In a MultiPanel configuration, only the Master Panel can access the Frame Diagnostics Menu.
Operating Tip — You can have the test run continuously by toggling Loop to Yes, on the
Frame TX/RX Test Menu. When the test reaches the end, it starts over from the beginning until
Loop is toggled to No.
3. Press Test to run the test on the selected serial communications port.
Operating Tip — If you want to monitor the communications on one of the communications
ports, you can select Monitor on the Frame TX/RX Test Menu to view the communications on
that port. Refer to the section “Communication Port Monitor” on page Eng 17-36 for more
information on using the Communications Port Monitor.
GPI Test
The GPI test allows you to test the functionality of each GPI input and output on the switcher. A
graphical representation of each GPI indicates whether a particular GPI is on or off. Refer to the
section “Standard GPI Setup” on page Eng 12-10 for more information on setting up and using
GPIs.
Eng 17–28 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
1. Press HOME Setup Frame Diagnostics GPI Test.
LEDs Test
The LEDs test allows you to confirm the functionality of the diagnostic LEDs on the frame CPU
Board. In order to complete this test you need to access the internal boards of the frame.
Note — You must remove the front door of the frame to perform this test. Refer to the section
“Opening and Closing the Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information on removing
and installing the frame door.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–29
Frame DIP Test Menu (4800AR-002 shown)
Eng 17–30 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
VNC Viewer
The Virtual Network Computing (VNC) viewer allows you to remotely control the menu system
of one of the control panels connected to the frame. You can only connect to one control panel at
a time.
Note — This feature requires Vision OS 37, or higher, to be running on all the control panel you
want to control. Contact Ross Video technical support for information on upgrading the OS on
your Vision control panels.
Note — The VNC Viewer requires Java to be installed for the browser you are using, and
popup blocking to be turned off.
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is
displayed.
2. Enter your username and password as follows when the Login Dialog Box appears. The
default Name is user and Password is password.
3. Click Other... VNC Viewer.
4. In the Panel list, click the control panel that you want to control. Control panels are
listed as Master or Satellite and by their IP addresses.
5. Click Launch VNC Viewer. A VNC Viewer applet page will open, causing a Java
window (sbc-vision) to open.
6. In the Java window, type user and press Enter.
7. Type password and press Enter.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–31
Video Checksum Custom Controls
The Video Checksums custom control is a diagnostic tool that allows Ross Video Technical
Support and other Ross Video staff to diagnose the operation of specific switcher functions based
on the video output of the MLEs. When a checksum is inserted into a custom control, the switcher
records the values that are returned at that point. When the custom control is run again, the
switcher compares the new values that are returned against the stored values and reports either an
error or a validation at the end of the custom control.
These tests are designed to be used by Ross Video Technical Support and other qualified Ross
Video personnel.
Note — In order for the checksum value to be validated, the video signal used when running
the test must be the same that was used when the custom control was recorded. Only stills or
internally generated signals, such as color patterns, should be used.
Checksums Menu
4. Toggle Checksums to On to activate this feature.
5. To perform a Short Checksum, press Short to have a short checksum performed.
When you choose a short checksum, you have to select the type of checksum to perform,
and which input or output video signal to perform the test on.
• Use the Checksum reg knob to select the Checksum Register you want to use.
You can choose between the following:
› FE out — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the output of
the Video Interface FPGAs on the Video Processor Board.
› Vid in — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the input of the
Video Core FPGA on the Video Processor Board.
› Vid out — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the output of
the Video Core FPGA on the Video Processor Board.
Eng 17–32 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
› FE in — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the input of the
Video Interface FPGAs on the Video Processor Board.
› All — Select this option to have the checksum calculated on all the checksum
registers.
• If you selected FE out or Vid in, use the Input video knob to select the video
signal that you want to perform the checksum on. You can choose between the
following:
› Background — Select this option to perform the checksum on the
Background video signal.
› Preset — Select this option to perform the checksum on the preset, or
Preview, video signal.
› K1V — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Video Fill signal of
Key 1.
› K1A/K2A — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Alpha signal
for all the Keys.
› Trans_mix 0/1 — Select this option to perform the checksum on the video
signals as a transition is being performed.
› K2V — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Video Fill signal of
Key 2.
• If you selected FE in or Vid out, use the Output video knob to select the video
signal that you want to perform the checksum on. You can choose between the
following:
› Program — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Program
video signal coming out of the MLE.
› Preview — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Preview video
signal coming out of the MLE.
› Clean — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Clean Feed video
signal coming out of the MLE.
6. Press Up One More Start Recording.
7. Add events into the custom control. Refer to the section “Programming Control Panel
Functions” on page Eng 10-10 for more information on adding events into a custom
control.
Important — A 4 frame Custom Control Pause Command should be added to the custom
control before each checksum point if the video signal has been changed. This ensures that
enough time has passed to allow the new video signals to propagate through the switcher.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–33
Insert Video Checksum
9. Select the MLE, or MLEs, that you want to calculate a checksum for.
10. Add events into the custom control as needed.
11. Press Finish Recording.
Note — Unless you select No action, a pop-up with the result of the checksum is displayed
when the checksum event has finished.
• No action — Select this option to have no action taken when the checksum custom
control is run.
Eng 17–34 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Log change — Select this option to have any changes in the checksum values
recorded to a system log that can be viewed by a Ross Video employee. A pop-up is
displayed when the custom control is finished. This is the default setting.
• Halt macro — Select this option to have any changes in the checksum values halt
the custom control and display the checksum event that returned the incorrect value.
A pop-up is displayed, indicating the problem.
• Recalc c’sums — Select this option to have the checksum values that are
returned the next time the checksum custom control is run saved as the new
checksum values. The existing checksum values is replaced with the new values. A
pop-up is displayed if any of the checksum values were replaced.
3. Press HOME.
4. Run the checksum custom control.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–35
Communication Port Monitor
The communications port monitor allows you to view the information that is being sent to or
received by the switcher. This information can then be saved to a file that can be sent to Ross
Video Technical Support if required.
The Com Port Monitor Menu is accessed through the Panel TX/RX Test Menu or the Frame
Tx/RX Test Menu. On that menu you must select which port you want to monitor.
Note — You cannot Save or turn on Streaming for a communications port that has been set to
a Baud Rate of 115200.
Operating Tip — Toggle Streaming to Yes to store all the data being transmitted from or
received by the selected communications port. Streaming stores data for a maximum of 1 hour,
at which point Streaming is toggled to No.
Eng 17–36 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
5. Toggle Freeze to No to start viewing the data that is being sent to or received by the
selected port.
6. Send or receive the commands you want to monitor.
7. Toggle Freeze to Yes to stop displaying the data on screen. At this point you can save
Operating Tip — At this point you can save the data displayed on screen by pressing Save
on the Com Port Monitor Menu.
If you saved, or streamed, the data to a file, you will have to navigate to the frame to view the file.
Note — Port Monitor file number is offset by three (3). For example, the file pan04tx.txt is from
the control panel, remote port 1, transmit data.
Operating Tip — Press the Refresh Files button updates the list of port monitor files. You
can also delete a file by selecting the file and pressing the Delete Selected Files button.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–37
Switcher Logs
Switcher logs are used by Ross Video Technical Support to track and diagnose possible problems
you might be having with your switcher. When asked for your switcher logs, you must log into
the frame and download the logs.
The switcher stores up to a week worth of log data at any time. This log data is usually broken up
into eight (8), 24-hour sets of log files.
Collecting Logs
At any one time there is a current log file, and up to seven archived log files. When you collect
the log files, you can either get all of the logs for the past week, or only the current log file that the
switcher is writing to.
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is displayed.
2. When the Login Dialog Box appears, enter your username and password as follows:
• In the Name field enter user. This is the factory default name.
• In the Password field enter password. This is the factory default password.
• Click OK to display the System Info Page.
Operating Tip — You can collect only the current log files by clicking on Get Current Logs
and following the instructions. Only the logs that the switcher is currently writing to are copied
and a new log is started.
3. Click Logs... Get All Logs to display the Get All Switcher Log Files Page.
4. Click Get All Switcher Log Files. The switcher starts collecting all of the log files
together into a single archive. This process may take several seconds to complete.
5. Click the stills/all-logs.tar.gz link to open or download the archive to your computer.
Deleting Logs
You can delete all or only the archived log files from the switcher. This allows you to free up
space on the switcher, or clean up the logs before starting to debug an issue for technical support.
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is displayed.
2. When the Login Dialog Box appears, enter your username and password as follows:
• In the Name field enter user. This is the factory default name.
• In the Password field enter password. This is the factory default password.
• Click OK to display the System Info Page.
Operating Tip — You can delete only the archived log files by clicking Delete Old Logs and
following the instructions. The current log files are unaffected.
3. Click Logs... Delete All Logs to display the Delete All Switcher Log Files Page.
4. Click Delete All Switcher Log Files.
Eng 17–38 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Cycling Logs
You can manually have the switcher start a new set of current log files. The old set of log files are
added to the archive, and the oldest set of archived log files are deleted.
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is displayed.
2. When the Login Dialog Box appears, enter your username and password as follows:
• In the Name field enter user. This is the factory default name.
• In the Password field enter password. This is the factory default password.
• Click OK to display the System Info Page.
3. Click Logs... Cycle Logs to display the Cycle Switcher Log Files Page.
4. Click Cycle Switcher Log Files. The switcher archived the current set of log files
and starts a new set of current log files.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–39
Eng 17–40 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Switcher Maintenance
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on maintaining and replacing the power supplies, fans, faders
and control panel modules of the Vision switcher. This includes diagnosing and replacing a failed
power supply, cleaning the filters and replacing a fader assembly. General information is also
provided for replacing a control panel module.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Control Panel Power Supply Failure
• Frame Power Supply Failure
• Frame Fan Failure
• Control Panel Power Supply
• Frame Power Supply
• Cleaning the Frame Air Filter
• Replacing the Hard Drive
• Replacing a Control Panel Module
• Dusting Mode
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present in the control panel as
long as any of the power supplies are connected to the AC power.
Note — The Vision control comes with a single power supply. If you purchased the Redundant
Power option, a second power supply is installed in the control panel.
Primary Secondary
Power Supply Power Supply
Module Module
2. Check the AC power cords for the failed Power Supply Modules. Ensure that they are
securely plugged into the control panel power supply, as well as the power outlet.
3. If each Power Supply Module is connected to separate circuits, check that there has not
been an interruption to the AC power for the failed power supply.
4. Lift up on the control panel lid to gain access to the control panel tub.
5. Locate the Power Distribution Board (Figure 18.2) at the back of the tub above the
Control Panel CPU Module.
Power Power Power Power
Supply 4 Supply 3 Supply 2 Supply 1
Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator
6. Using the Power Supply Indicators (Figure 18.2), identify the power supply that has
failed. If a power supply is not providing power, or is not installed, the Power Supply
Indicator will not be lit.
• Vision 3 and 4 — Power Supplies 1 and 2 are located in the Primary Power
Supply Module and Power Supplies 3 and 4 are located in the Secondary Power
Supply Module.
• Vision 1 and 2 — Power Supply 1 is located in the Primary Power Supply
Module and Power Supply 2 is located in the Secondary Power Supply Module.
Note — If all the Power Supply Indicators are lit, check the cables between the power
supplies and the Power Distribution Board.
7. Remove the failed Power Supply Module. Refer to the section “Replacing a Power
Supply Module” on page Eng 18-4 for information on replacing a power supply
module.
Primary Secondary
Power Supply Power Supply
Module Module
2. Place a small piece of paper in front of each cooling fan in the Power Supply Module to
determine if the fan is moving air.
3. If a cooling fan is not moving air, or is moving much less than the other fans, that Power
Supply Module must be replaced. Refer to the section “Replacing a Power Supply
Module” on page Eng 18-4 for information on replacing a Power Supply Module.
Secondary Primary
Power Power
Supply Supply
Module Module
Figure 18.4 Power Supplies Inside The Control Panel Tub — Vision 4
2. Disconnect the AC power cords from the back of the Power Supply Module that
contains the failed power supply.
3. Label and remove the Power Supply Status Cables and Power Supply Cables for each
power supply in the Power Supply Module before you remove them. If there is only
power supply in the module, you do not need to label the cables.
4. Disconnect the Power Supply Status Cables and Power Supply Power Cables for the
power supplies in the Power Supply Module that you want to remove.
5. Remove the 2 retaining screws along the front flange of the Power Supply Module.
6. Slide the failed Power Supply Module out of the control panel tub and place on a clean,
dry surface.
7. Slide the new Power Supply Module into the open slot in the control panel tub that you
just removed the failed Power Supply Module from.
8. Replace the 2 retaining screws along the front flange of the Power Supply Module.
Note — If you do not connect the cables to the proper power supplies, you may cause the
Status Menu to give false readings.
Power Supply
Slot 1
Slot 2
Power Supply
Slot 3
8. Use the following table (Table 18.1) to diagnose the status of each power supply and
determine the corrective action.
9. Replace the power supply if needed. Refer to the section “Replacing a Frame Power
Supply” on page Eng 18-13 for information on replacing a power supply.
9 10
11 1 8
4 5 7 12 13
10
9 11
8
5 12
13
4 7
15 6
3 14 14 6
1 2
2
3 15
Figure 18.6 QMD-X Fan Board (4800AR-030 and 4800AR-031) Fan Numbers
6 7 8 9 10
13 14
11 12 15
2 1
5 6 7
4 3
3. Shut down the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-3 for information on powering down the switcher.
4. Remove the front door of the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information.
5. The System Status Indicators on the left side of the frame changes from Green to Red,
indicating that it is safe to turn the power off.
6. Remove the Fan Carrier Board from the frame.
7. Replace the failed fans as required.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present within the power supply
for a short period of time after removal from the control panel. The power supply cover is
intended to protect the user from access to these areas, and should not be removed. Ross
Video Power Supply Module are intended to be factory serviced by qualified Ross Video service
personnel only.
1
6 8
2
5
3 7
1) Power Supply 1 Power Connector 4) Power Supply 2 Status Connector 7) Power Supply 2 Cooling Fan
2) Power Supply 1 Status Connector 5) Power Switch 8) AC Plug
3) Power Supply 2 Power Connector 6) Power Supply 1 Cooling Fan
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present within the power supply
for a short period of time after removal from the frame. The power supply cover is intended to
protect the user from access to these areas, and should not be removed. Ross Video power
supplies are intended to be factory serviced by qualified Ross Video service personnel only.
Service or any component replacement other than the AC input fuse is not advised.
Power Supply
1 2
1. Power Switch
The Power Switch is used to turn the individual power supplies on and off. The switch is in the
off position when it is toggled down.
2. Green Power Indicator
This green indicator illuminates to show that the power supply is functioning properly.
3. Yellow Standby Indicator
This yellow indicator illuminates to show that the power supply is in standby mode. A power
supply will be in standby mode because the master power switch or the power switch on the
power supply has been turned off.
4. Red Fail Indicator
This red indicator illuminates to show that the power supply is not operating. This is because the
power supply has failed or is installed incorrectly.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present on the pins of supply
mating connectors within the frame power supply housing area. To reduce the risk of electric
shock, keep clear of mating connectors within the supply area when power supplies modules
are not installed.
1. Remove the front door of the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information.
2. Locate the power supply to be replaced.
Important — If you do not have redundant power installed in your frame, you must power
down the frame before proceeding, if it is not already off.
3. Switch the power supply Off by toggling the power switch down.
4. Loosen the 2 screws holding the slider catch in place until the catch moves freely
(Figure 18.11).
Screws
FA BY
D
IL
ST R
AN
E
W
PO
Caution — The metal cage surrounding the power supply may be hot after prolonged
switcher operation.
6. Grasp the tab and gently pull the power supply out of the frame.
7. Switch the replacement power supply Off by toggling the power switch down.
Warning — The 500 Watt (4800AR-014) and 700 Watt (4800AR-024) power supplies cannot
be used in the same frame at the same time; doing so may damage the power supply, the
frame, or both.
8. Install the new power supply by sliding it into the open slot and pushing it firmly into
place.
9. Move the slider catch to the left until it hooks the side of the slot.
10. Tighten the screws to secure the slider catch in place.
Filter
To Remove
4. While servicing the air filter, replace the front cover of the frame to ensure no dust or
debris falls into the frame.
5. Brush any loose dust off of the filter.
6. Place the filter under warm running water to remove any remaining dust. On one side of
the filter is a “bug screen” mesh. When rinsing, water should flow out of this side.
7. Remove the filter from the water and pat dry with a towel to remove any moisture.
8. Remove the front cover of the frame.
9. Replace the clean, dry filter back into the air filter slot in the frame. Ensure that the side
with the mesh is facing the outer wall of the frame, and the edge without the foam is
situated at the front of the frame.
10. Replace the front cover of the frame.
With the air filter cleaned, it is a good idea to record how dirty it was and how long it has been
since the last cleaning. If the filter was very dirty, you should shorten the interval between
cleanings to compensate for your particular conditions.
Note — The software provided on the spare hard drive should be the current shipping version
at the time the hard drive was imaged. This may not be the newest version of software available.
Once you have installed the spare hard drive, you should contact Ross Video for the most
current version of the software.
Hard Drive
4. Release the Ribbon Cable from the Ribbon Cable Connector by pressing down and
out on the Ejector Tabs at either end of the Ribbon Cable Connector (Figure 18.14).
5. Flip the CPU Board over so that the Hard Drive is facing down.
6. Locate the four Retaining Screw securing the Hard Drive in place (Figure 18.15).
Retaining Screws
Note — Ensure that you do not damage the rubber spacers located at each screw hole when
you remove the Hard Drive.
9. Remove the Hard Drive from the CPU Board and place in a safe location.
10. Remove the Ribbon Cable from the Hard Drive you just removed and install it onto
the replacement Hard Drive. Ensure that the stripe on the Ribbon Cable is aligned
towards the four unused pins as illustrated (Figure 18.16).
CPU Board
Ribbon Cable
Pin1
Caution — Ensure that you connect the Ribbon Cable to the pins illustrated (Figure 18.16).
If the Ribbon Cable is not properly connected, your Hard Drive could be damaged when the
switcher is powered On.
11. Ensuring that the Rubber Spacers are in place, install the replacement Hard Drive
using the 4 Retaining Screws you removed earlier (Figure 18.17).
Rubber Spacer
CPU Board
Retaining Screw
Caution — Do not over tighten the Retaining Screws. These screws only need to be snug in
order to secure the Hard Drive in place.
12. Push the Ribbon Cable into the Ribbon Cable Connector until the Ejector Tabs at
either end of the Ribbon Cable Connector close together, securing the Ribbon Cable
in place.
13. Re-install the Frame CPU Board into the same slot in the frame that you removed it
from.
You may have to reset your network configurations or update your software version.
Hard Drive
Connector
4. Flip the CPU Board over so that the Hard Drive is facing down. Ensure that you do not
dislodge or damage the heat sinks on the top of the board.
5. Locate the four Retaining Screw securing the Hard Drive in place (Figure 18.19).
Retaining Screws
Note — Ensure that you do not damage the rubber spacers located at each screw hole when
you remove the Hard Drive.
8. Ensuring that the Rubber Spacers are in place, install the replacement Hard Drive by
angling it slightly down towards the Hard Drive Connector and pushing it firmly onto
the connector.
Hard Drive
Connector
9. Secure the replacement Hard Drive using the 4 Retaining Screws you removed earlier
(Figure 18.19).
10. Re-install the Frame CPU Board into the same slot in the frame that you removed it
from.
You may have to reset your network configurations or update your software version.
Note — Installing control panel modules in different locations than the default is not supported
at this time.
PMC Board
Power Connector
Note — The Preview Bus Module connects to the Module Control Link Backbone through the
Positioner Module. To remove either of these modules, the 26-Pin ribbon cable between the
two modules must be removed. The Preview Bus will not operate properly if it is not connected
to the Positioner Module.
6. Disconnect the Module Control Link Cables from the module you want to remove
(Figure 18.22). This CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) cable delivers all the command signals to
and from the module, as well as other modules in the same row.
To Previous Module
Figure 18.22 Panel Module Controller (PMC) — Module Control Link Connectors
7. Remove the Retaining Bolts located at each corner of the module and keep them in a
safe place. A ¼ inch hex driver or wrench is required.
8. Remove the module from the control panel and place it on a clean, static free surface.
Important — If a replacement module is not available, you must install and secure a blank
module cover plate to replace the module until the new module is available.
Next, you will have to install the new control panel module.
Note — The Preview Bus Module connects to the Module Control Link Backbone through the
Positioner Module. To remove either of these modules, the 26-Pin ribbon cable between the
two modules must be removed. The Preview Bus will not operate properly if it is not connected
to the Positioner Module.
8. Connect and secure the Module Control Link Cables to the module you are installing
(Figure 18.23). This CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) cable delivers all the command signals to
and from the module, as well as other modules in the same row.
To Previous Module
Figure 18.23 Panel Module Controller (PMC) — Module Control Link Connectors
9. Connect and secure the Module Power Cable to the module you want to install (Figure
18.24). This 6-conductor ribbon cable delivers power to all the modules in the row, when
installing it, ensure that you do not accidental unplug it from any neighboring modules.
PMC Board
Power Connector
10. Close the control panel lid and reconnect the Main and Redundant (if installed) power to
the control panel.
11. Power up the control panel. Refer to the section “Powering Up the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-2 for information on powering up the control panel.
12. If the message PMCs need to be upgraded; please go to Panel Modules menu
is shown on the Main Menus, you need to upgrade your PMC. Refer to the section
“Upgrading PMCs” on page Eng 18-23 for information on upgrading PMCs.
13. Test the functionality of the new module. Refer to the section “Control Panel
Diagnostic Tools” on page Eng 17-18 for more information on performing control panel
diagnostics.
14. Assign the module to a Crosspoint Group, or row, on the control panel. Refer to the
section “Mapping a Module to a Row” on page Eng 17-5 for more information on
assigning a module to a crosspoint group.
Upgrading PMCs
The Panel Module Controllers (PMCs) may need to be upgraded if you perform a software
upgrade or replace a module. If PMCs need to be upgraded, the message PMCs need to be
upgraded; please go to Panel Modules menu is shown on the Main Menus.
Caution — Do not use water, or any other liquid cleaner, to clean the surface of the control
panel. Doing so can cause personal injury and/or damage to the control panel itself. A dry
duster, vacuum, or low pressure compressed air should be used to clean the surface of the
control panel.
Dusting Menu
2. Dust the surface of the control panel as required. In dusting mode the switcher will not
act upon any input from the control panel.
3. Press the F1 and F6 buttons simultaneously to take the control panel out of dusting
mode. The F1 and F6 buttons are the two physical buttons located below the two EXIT
buttons on the Dusting Menu.
In This Appendix
This appendix provides information on the various branches of the Vision menu system.
The following menu trees are discussed in this appendix:
• Setup and Installation Menu Trees
• Source Configuration Menu Tree
• Output BNC Menu Tree
• Communications Menu Tree
• Custom Control Bank Menu Tree
• Custom Controls Menu Tree
• File Storage Menu Tree
• Recall Factory Menu Tree
• Squeeze & Tease and Effects Menu Tree
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–1
Setup and Installation Menu Trees
Setup (1-3)
Setup (2-3)
Setup (3-3)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Installation (2-3)
Installation (3-3)
Eng 19–2 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Source Configuration Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–3
Output BNC Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Output (1-2)
Output (2-2)
Eng 19–4 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Communications Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Communications (1-2)
Communications (2-2)
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–5
Custom Control Bank Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Installation (2-3)
Custom Controls
Eng 19–6 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Custom Controls Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–7
File Storage Menu Tree
Disk (1-2)
Disk (1-2)
Eng 19–8 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Disk Store Individual Item Menu Tree
Disk (1-2)
Disk (1-2)
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–9
Recall Factory Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Installation (2-3)
Installation (3-3)
Eng 19–10 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Squeeze & Tease and Effects Menu Tree
Effects (1-3)
Effects (2-3)
Effects (3-3)
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–11
Squeeze & Tease MD Border Menu Tree
S&T MD Border
Eng 19–12 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Squeeze & Tease MD Preprocessor Menu Tree
S&T MD Preprocessor
S&T MD Lighting
S&T WARP
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–13
Eng 19–14 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Appendix B. Specifications
In The Appendix
This appendix provides technical specifications and connector pinout diagrams for the Vision
switcher.
The following topics are discussed in this appendix:
• Standard Components
• General Switcher Specifications
• Physical Specifications
• Communication Specifications
• Video Characteristics
• Frame Pinouts
• Control Panel Pinouts
• Control Panel CPU Module Ports
• Remote Aux Panel Pinouts
• Aux Panel Programming Mode Summary
Table 20.4 Frame Power Supply Modules for Fully Populated Frame
Octane/QMD-X MD-X QMD MD
Power Supply Watts 700W 500W 700W 500W
Number of Supplies (Min/Max) 2/4 3/4 1/2 1/2
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
4 5 6 DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
Height
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 PST CHROMA KEY MASK FLY CHAN KEY
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 4 5 6
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 PST CHROMA KEY MASK FLY CHAN KEY
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
4 5 6 DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3 MLE 4 SRC PV PGM SOURCE VTR SAFE CENTER TIME MASK HIDE CUT FADE
ID TC TITLE CLOCK PV OVER
PST TRANS KEY TRANS SEL SEL SEL SEL ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
1 2 3 4 MLE RECALL 4 5 6 FADE MLE
1 CLIP RATE 1
CUT CUT CUT CUT
MLE 1 2 3 EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 2 RATE 2 DEFLT
ROLL CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
CLIP TRANS 4 DISS BANK DEFLT ENTER RATE 4 LOCK
TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS
th
Dep
Width
Figure 20.1 Control Panel Dimensions
Frame Dimensions
The information provided in the following table (Table 20.8) lists the frame dimensions for the
frame.
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
Caution — Incorrect DIP switch settings may make your switcher inoperable. If your switcher
does not appear to boot properly, and will not pass video, check that all DIP switches are in the
OFF position. Do not change the position of the DIP switches unless instructed to do so by Ross
Video Technical Support.
External Links
The External Link Ports are located on the back of the control panel and support the Touchscreen
Display, Auxiliary Control Panels, and any External Modules that are connected to the switcher.
The Touchscreen Display must be connected to External Link Port 1 (Link 1) in order to
operate properly.
Internal Links
The internal links support all the modules in the Vision control panel, including the crosspoint,
and custom control buttons. The module that is assigned to a particular link and node will depend
on the control panel that you are using.
SEL
SEL
Link6 Link6
Node1 Node0
Link8 Link8 Link8
Node0 Node1 Node2
Link6 Link6
Node1 Node0
Link8 Link8
Node0 Node1
Video Processing
The Vision switcher has the following video processing characteristics:
• 10 bit 4:2:2 Component Digital Video and Key Processing
• 4:3 and Anamorphic 16:9 switchable Aspect Ratio where applicable
Video Formats
The Vision switcher supports the following Input Reference and Video Formats (Table 20.12).
References to 1080p 59.94Hz (A) and 1080p 50Hz (A) refer to 1080p Level A only.
*Important — It is not recommended that you operate the switcher in these video formats
when you are using a composite sync (480i or 576i) reference signal.
Timing
The Vision switcher has the following system timing characteristics:
• All video inputs are zero-time relative to reference input
• Auto timing correct for inputs out of sync by up to ± ¼ line (16us)
Note — In SD Mode, Error Detection and Handling (EDH) signals are inserted into all video
outputs, and can be disabled. Aux Bus outputs do not have EDH insertion, but do pass
previously inserted EDH.
Peripheral Ports
The 4 DB9 Peripheral ports (Figure 20.12) on the back of the frame support both the RS-232
(TIA/EIA-232) and RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standards. The following table (Table
20.16) lists the signal pinouts for the Peripheral ports.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Panel Port
Note — The Panel port is not used by the Vision control panel. The Panel port is only used to
connect to the Synergy control panel.
The single RJ-45 Panel port (Figure 20.13) on the back of the frame supports the RS-422
transmission standard for direct connection to the control panel. The following table (Table
20.17) lists the signal pinouts for the Panel ports.
12345678
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
LAN Ports
The 2 RJ-45 LAN ports (Figure 20.15) on the back of the frame support 10Base-T and
100Base-TX Ethernet communication. The following table (Table 20.19) lists the signal pinouts
for the LAN port.
12345678
AC Power Ports
The 3-pin IEC AC Power ports (Figure 20.16) on the back of the frame deliver AC power to the
power supplies in the frame. The following table (Table 20.20) lists the signal pinouts for the AC
Power ports.
Remote Ports
The 8 DB9 Remote ports (Figure 20.17) on the back of the control panel support both the RS-232
(TIA/EIA-232) and RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standards. The following table (Table
20.21) lists the signal pinouts for the Remote ports.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Note — The Touchscreen Display must be connected to External Link port 1 (Link 1) in order
to operate properly.
Tally Ports
The DB25 Tally ports (Figure 20.19) on the back of the control panel provide the solid state
contact closure to tally common tally signals. The following table (Table 20.23) lists the signal
pinouts for the Aux ports.
• Tally Rating: 150mA @ 100V DC (25°C operating temperature)
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Note — Tally Ports 3 through 8 are used for the extended tallies option and require the
extended tallies hardware to be installed before they can be used.
AC Power Ports
The 2 3-pin IEC AC Power ports (Figure 20.20) on the back of the control panel deliver AC
power to the power supplies in the control panel. The following table (Table 20.24) lists the
signal pinouts for the AC Power ports.
1 2
Important — The Control Panel CPU Module is designed to be a closed module and should
not be opened or serviced except by Ross Video Technical Support.
4
6 1
7 8
5 3 2
1. Power Connector
The power connector uses a single 4-Pin, friction fit Molex connector to provide 12V DC to the
Control Panel CPU Module from the Power Distribution Board.
2. Module Control Link Ports
The Module Control Link backbone uses 10, independent, 8-Pin, RJ-45 connectors to interface to
the various internal PMCs on the control panel modules.
3. Fan Status Port
The Fan Status Port uses a single 8-Pin, RJ-45 connector to interface with the Power Distribution
Board to pass fan status information from the individual cooling fans.
6 7 5
4 3 2 1
Note — Other ports found on the Control Panel CPU Module are not supported at this time and
should not be used.
GPI Port
The DB9 GPI port (Figure 20.23) on the back of the Remote Aux Panel provide a total of 8 GPI
Inputs. The following table (Table 20.25) lists the signal pinouts for the GPI I/O port.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Important — Remote Aux Panel GPI inputs are only intended for connection to “dry contact”,
open collector type transistor outputs, or +5 VDC signals. Application of any negative voltages,
or voltages in excess of +5 VDC, may damage the GPI inputs.
Main Port
The RJ-12 Main port (Figure 20.24) on the back of the Remote Aux Panel connects to the Aux
port on the control panel, or the Echo port on the previous aux panel in the daisy-chain. The
following table (Table 20.27) shows the signal pinouts for the Aux ports.
123456
Echo Port
The RJ-12 Echo port (Figure 20.25) on the back of the Remote Aux Panel connects to the Main
port on the next aux panel in the daisy-chain. The following table (Table 20.26) shows the signal
pinouts for the Aux ports.
123456
In The Appendix
This appendix provides worksheets that can be used when setting up and using your Vision
switcher.
The following worksheets are provided:
• Video Input Worksheet
• Bus Map Worksheet
• Video Output Worksheet
• Communications Worksheet
• Standard GPI I/O Input Worksheets
• Standard GPI I/O Output Worksheets
• Aux Panel GPI I/O Worksheet
• Custom Control Worksheets
• Conversion Loop Worksheets
• Custom Device Protocol Worksheets
GPI 9
GPI 10
GPI 11
GPI 12
GPI 13
GPI 14
GPI 15
GPI 16
GPI 17
GPI 18
GPI 19
GPI 20
GPI 21
GPI 22
GPI 23
GPI 24
GPI 25
GPI 33
GPI 34
GPI 35
GPI 36
GPI 37
GPI 38
GPI 39
GPI 40
GPI 41
GPI 42
GPI 43
GPI 44
GPI 45
GPI 46
GPI 47
GPI 48
GPI 49
GPI 50
GPI 51
GPI 52
GPI 53
GPI 54
GPI 55
GPI 56
GPI 57
Bytes
#2 Description Tag
Bytes
#3 Description Tag
Bytes
#4 Description Tag
Bytes
#5 Description Tag
Bytes
#6 Description Tag
Bytes
#7 Description Tag
Bytes
#8 Description Tag
Bytes
#9 Description Tag
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
#2 Description Tag
Bytes
#3 Description Tag
Bytes
#4 Description Tag
Bytes
#5 Description Tag
Bytes
#6 Description Tag
Bytes
#7 Description Tag
Bytes
#8 Description Tag
Bytes
#9 Description Tag
Bytes
Bytes
Operating Tip — Helpful Abbreviations: H=Hex, B=BCD, AH=ASCII Hex, AB=ASCII BCD /
1-8 (digits) or 4,8...32 (bits) /M=Mot, I=Int., /S=Sca, E=Ext, +=Sign
In This Appendix
The Vision switcher uses software under one or more of the following licence agreements:
• GNU General Public License
• Lesser GNU Public License (LGPL)
• BSD License
• Apache License
• Expat License
• Imlib2
• Jiffy
• Fedora 14 - License Agreement
• PSF LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.7.3
Note — As required by the GNU General Public License, and the Lesser GNU Public License
(LGPL), source code can be obtained from Ross Video for at least 3 years. Contact Ross Video
Technical Support for more information.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–1
GNU General Public License
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee
your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library
General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software
or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to
certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the
software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributes of a free program will individually obtain patent
licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not
restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by
running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.) _
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms
of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control
the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the
source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
Eng 22–2 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or
its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on
you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section
as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only
in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”,
you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE
THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–3
Lesser GNU Public License (LGPL)
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute
verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to
guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and
other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the
better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate
to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink
them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on,
the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a
free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent
with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies
to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of
the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides
other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To
achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In
this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example,
permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the
freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a
“work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executable.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either
the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the
Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the
Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you
may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a. The modified work must itself be a software library.
b. You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
c. You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
Eng 22–4 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
d. If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control
the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter
all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change
in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and
derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the
Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing
that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of
the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and
reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as
well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a. Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable
“work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to
recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b. Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already
present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of
the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c. Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge
no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d. If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from
the same place.
e. Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from
it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with
the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such
a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this
License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a. Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b. Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–5
on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on
you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section
as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims
or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in
reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and
a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library
does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for
this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Eng 22–6 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
BSD License
General
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–7
Apache License
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
“License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For
the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (i) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
“You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
“Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and
configuration files.
“Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object
code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
“Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is
included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
“Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions,
annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall
not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
“Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative
Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to
submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”
“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently
incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have
made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with
the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation
against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the
Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory
patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative
Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object
form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source
form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
d. If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of
the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along
with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The
contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within
Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices
cannot be construed as modifying the License.
Eng 22–8 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–9
Expat License
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd. and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
1. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
2. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Eng 22–10 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Imlib2
Copyright (C) 2000 Carsten Haitzler and various contributors (see AUTHORS)
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies of the Software and its Copyright notices. In addition publicly documented
acknowledgment must be given that this software has been used if no source code of this software is made available publicly. Making the source available publicly
means including the source for this software with the distribution, or a method to get this software via some reasonable mechanism (electronic transfer via a network
or media) as well as making an offer to supply the source on request. This Copyright notice serves as an offer to supply the source on request as well. Instead of this,
supplying acknowledgments of use of this software in either Copyright notices, Manuals, Publicity and Marketing documents or any documentation provided with
any product containing this software. This License does not apply to any software that links to the libraries provided by this software (statically or dynamically), but
only to the software provided.
Please see the COPYING-PLAIN for a plain-english explanation of this notice and its intent.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–11
Jiffy
Copyright (C) 2009 Paul Duncan [email protected]
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Eng 22–12 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Fedora 14 - License Agreement
LICENSE AGREEMENT
FEDORA(TM) 14
This agreement governs the download, installation or use of the Software (as defined below) and any updates to the Software, regardless of the delivery mechanism.
The Software is a collective work under U.S. Copyright Law. Subject to the following terms, Red Hat grants to the user ("User") a license to this collective work
pursuant to the GNU General Public License version 2. By downloading, installing or using the Software, User agrees to the terms of this agreement.
1. THE SOFTWARE. Fedora (the "Software") is a modular Linux operating system consisting of hundreds of software components. The end user license agreement
for each component is located in the component's source code. With the exception of certain image files containing the Fedora trademark identified in Section 2
below, the license terms for the components permit User to copy and redistribute the component. With the potential exception of certain firmware files (denoted in
the License field of the RPM packaging), the license terms for the components permit User to copy, modify and redistribute the component, in both source code and
binary code forms. This agreement does not limit User's rights under, or grant User rights that supersede, the license terms of any particular component.
2. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. The Software and each of its components, including the source code, documentation, appearance, structure and
organization are copyrighted by Red Hat and others and are protected under copyright and other laws. Title to the Software and any component, or to any copy,
modification, or merged portion shall remain with the aforementioned, subject to the applicable license. The "Fedora" trademark is a trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
("Red Hat") in the U.S. and other countries and is used by permission. This agreement permits User to distribute unmodified copies of Software using the Fedora
trademark on the condition that User follows Red Hat's trademark guidelines located at http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Legal. User must abide by these trademark
guidelines when distributing the Software, regardless of whether the Software has been modified. If User modifies the Software, then User must replace all images
containing the "Fedora" trademark. Those images are in the fedora-logos package.
3. LIMITED WARRANTY. Except as specifically stated in this agreement or a license for a particular component, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND THE COMPONENTS ARE PROVIDED AND LICENSED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Neither the Fedora Project nor Red Hat warrants that the functions contained in the Software will meet User's requirements or that the
operation of the Software will be entirely error free or appear precisely as described in the accompanying documentation. USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AT USER'S
OWN RISK.
4. LIMITATION OF REMEDIES AND LIABILITY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, FEDORA PROJECT AND RED
HAT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO USER FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS OR LOST
SAVINGS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF FEDORA PROJECT OR RED HAT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
5. EXPORT CONTROL. As required by U.S. law, User represents and warrants that it: (a) understands that the Software is subject to export controls under the U.S.
Commerce Department's Export Administration Regulations ("EAR"); (b) is not located in a prohibited destination country under the EAR or U.S. sanctions
regulations (currently Cuba, Iran, Iraq, North Korea, Sudan and Syria); (c) will not export, re-export, or transfer the Software to any prohibited destination, entity, or
individual without the necessary export license(s) or authorizations(s) from the U.S. Government; (d) will not use or transfer the Software for use in any sensitive
nuclear, chemical or biological weapons, or missile technology end-uses unless authorized by the U.S. Government by regulation or specific license; (e) understands
and agrees that if it is in the United States and exports or transfers the Software to eligible end users, it will, as required by EAR Section 741.17(e), submit
semi-annual reports to the Commerce Department's Bureau of Industry & Security (BIS), which include the name and address (including country) of each transferee;
and (f) understands that countries other than the United States may restrict the import, use, or export of encryption products and that it shall be solely responsible for
compliance with any such import, use, or export restrictions.
6. GENERAL. If any provision of this agreement is held to be unenforceable, that shall not affect the enforceability of the remaining provisions. This agreement
shall be governed by the laws of the State of North Carolina and of the United States, without regard to any conflict of laws provisions, except that the United Nations
Convention on the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
All rights reserved. "Red Hat" and "Fedora" are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. "Linux" is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–13
PSF LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.7.3
1. This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Python Software Foundation (“PSF”),
and the Individual or Organization (“Licensee”) accessing and otherwise using Python
2.7.3 software in source or binary form and its associated documentation.
2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, PSF hereby grants
Licensee a nonexclusive, royalty-free, world-wide license to reproduce, analyze, test,
perform and/or display publicly, prepare derivative works, distribute, and otherwise use
Python 2.7.3 alone or in any derivative version, provided, however, that PSF’s License
Agreement and PSF’s notice of copyright, i.e., “Copyright © 2001-2012 Python
Software Foundation; All Rights Reserved” are retained in Python 2.7.3 alone or in any
derivative version prepared by Licensee.
3. In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on or incorporates Python
2.7.3 or any part thereof, and wants to make the derivative work available to others as
provided herein, then Licensee hereby agrees to include in any such work a brief
summary of the changes made to Python 2.7.3.
4. PSF is making Python 2.7.3 available to Licensee on an “AS IS” basis. PSF MAKES
NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY
OF EXAMPLE, BUT NOT LIMITATION, PSF MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY
REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR
ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF PYTHON 2.7.3 WILL NOT
INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
5. PSF SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF
PYTHON 2.7.3 FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A RESULT OF MODIFYING, DISTRIBUTING, OR
OTHERWISE USING PYTHON 2.7.3, OR ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
6. This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms
and conditions.
7. Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency,
partnership, or joint venture between PSF and Licensee. This License Agreement does
not grant permission to use PSF trademarks or trade name in a trademark sense to
endorse or promote products or services of Licensee, or any third party.
8. By copying, installing or otherwise using Python 2.7.3, Licensee agrees to be bound by
the terms and conditions of this License Agreement.
Eng 22–14 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Appendix E. Custom Device
Protocols
In This Appendix
This appendix provides information for setting up a custom device and programming a serial
protocol to communicate with that device from a Vision peripheral or remote port.
The following topics are discussed in this appendix:
• Custom Devices – Uses and Limitations
• Advanced Topics and Tables
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols • Eng 23–1
Custom Devices – Uses and Limitations
Custom Device commands allow you to select the signals that the switcher sends to the custom
device when you select a command on the switcher. For example, when you create a Play DVE
custom control for CUSTOM0, the signal that you coded for that command is sent to the
CUSTOM0 device when that custom control is run.
Operating Tip — You can control devices other than VTRs, Video Servers, Audio Servers or
External DVEs by substituting their commands for those in the Command-tag list of the Custom
Device Menu. Make sure to note these substitution on the Custom Device Protocol Worksheet.
When working with a custom device protocol, the following limitations apply:
• The custom device protocol supports only one way communication. The switcher will not
record or act upon signals being returned from the custom device. Therefore, queries for
Current-time-sense (such as grab timecode), Inpoint, Outpoint and Clip-ID-names are not
supported.
• Some protocol signals may exceed the maximum number of bytes (19) allocated per
command. In cases where a custom control is used, 2 command slots (and 2 tags) can be
used and a custom control programmed to run both of them in immediate succession.
Each user-programmed device supports a maximum of 10 command slots. There may be
other practical problems with the protocol you are trying to reproduce that may render
custom devices unsuitable.
Eng 23–2 • Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Advanced Topics and Tables
Besides strings of constant Hex values (bytes), commands can be programmed with special
characters and with converted parameter values. Examples of the special characters include the
two special values to perform a communications break. The communications break is formed by a
data zero event that extends beyond the normal data bit length permitted in the serial data word
(for example, serial word length of 8-Odd-1Stop bit is 1+8+1+1 = 11 bits long). The commonly
used minimum length for break is 17 bits long or one and a half to two data-words. To implement
a break in custom devices, there needs to be a [Break On], a [Break Off], and an optional delay
in between.
Certain commands pass a parameter to the custom device driver that can be converted into a
string of bytes using a special packed command in place of a single byte. Only one of these
special command lines may appear in any given command slot (since only one parameter is ever
passed). This command line is converted during runtime into the specified one to four bytes of
parameter data, and included at that location in the command string. One command tag that gets a
parameter is the Cue to Clip command. The value passed when a Cue to Clip command is
triggered is the desired cue time as represented in a packed word timecode format. Typically, this
value must then be converted into some representation of packed timecode bytes to be sent to the
external device. The packed command flags are described in the following table. You may want
to use the Panel Diagnostic\RX/TX\Monitor to view the results when using parameters in
commands.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols • Eng 23–3
Table 23.3 Special Options
Selection Description
Mot Motorola ordering. Most Significant Byte (MSB) first, LSB last.
Int Intel ordering. Least Significant Byte (LSB) first, MSB last.
Scaled (Sca) Re-scales a 12-bit parameter to fit output range.
ASCII Extended Extends up the output to an even number of digits/characters without changing
(Ext) the output range.
Signed (Sign) Internal use — sign conversion.
Eng 23–4 • Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Table 23.6 Decimal to Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Table
Decimal Hex ASCII Decimal Hex ASCII Decimal Hex ASCII Decimal Hex Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
0 00 43 2B + 86 56 V 129 81 172 AC 215 D7
1 01 44 2C , 87 57 W 130 82 173 AD 216 D8
2 02 45 2D - 88 58 X 131 83 174 AE 217 D9
3 03 46 2E . 89 59 Y 132 84 175 AF 218 DA
4 04 47 2F / 90 5A Z 133 85 176 B0 219 DB
5 05 48 30 0 91 5B [ 134 86 177 B1 220 DC
6 06 49 31 1 92 5C \ 135 87 178 B2 221 DD
7 07 50 32 2 93 5D ] 136 88 179 B3 222 DE
8 08 51 33 3 94 5E ^ 137 89 180 B4 223 DF
9 09 52 34 4 95 5F _ 138 8A 181 B5 224 E0
10 0A 53 35 5 96 60 ` 139 8B 182 B6 225 E1
11 0B 54 36 6 97 61 a 140 8C 183 B7 226 E2
12 0C 55 37 7 98 62 b 141 8D 184 B8 227 E3
13 0D 56 38 8 99 63 c 142 8E 185 B9 228 E4
14 0E 57 39 9 100 64 d 143 8F 186 BA 229 E5
15 0F 58 3A : 101 65 e 144 90 187 BB 230 E6
16 10 59 3B ; 102 66 f 145 91 188 BC 231 E7
17 11 60 3C < 103 67 g 146 92 189 BD 232 E8
18 12 61 3D = 104 68 h 147 93 190 BE 233 E9
19 13 62 3E > 105 69 i 148 94 191 BF 234 EA
20 14 63 3F ? 106 6A j 149 95 192 C0 235 EB
21 15 64 40 @ 107 6B k 150 96 193 C1 236 EC
22 16 65 41 A 108 6C l 151 97 194 C2 237 ED
23 17 66 42 B 109 6D m 152 98 195 C3 238 EE
24 18 67 43 C 110 6E n 153 99 196 C4 239 EF
25 19 68 44 D 111 6F o 154 9A 197 C5 240 F0
26 1A 69 45 E 112 70 p 155 9B 198 C6 241 F1
27 1B 70 46 F 113 71 q 156 9C 199 C7 242 F2
28 1C 71 47 G 114 72 r 157 9D 200 C8 243 F3
29 1D 72 48 H 115 73 s 158 9E 201 C9 244 F4
30 1E 73 49 I 116 74 t 159 9F 202 CA 245 F5
31 1F 74 4A J 117 75 u 160 A0 203 CB 246 F6
32 20 space 75 4B K 118 76 v 161 A1 204 CC 247 F7
33 21 ! 76 4C L 119 77 w 162 A2 205 CD 248 F8
34 22 " 77 4D M 120 78 x 163 A3 206 CE 249 F9
35 23 # 78 4E N 121 79 y 164 A4 207 CF 250 FA
36 24 $ 79 4F O 122 7A z 165 A5 208 D0 251 FB
37 25 % 80 50 P 123 7B { 166 A6 209 D1 252 FC
38 26 & 81 51 Q 124 7C | 167 A7 210 D2 253 FD
39 27 ' 82 52 R 125 7D } 168 A8 211 D3 254 FE
40 28 ( 83 53 S 126 7E ~ 169 A9 212 D4 255 FF
41 29 ) 84 54 T 127 7F 170 AA 213 D5
42 2A * 85 55 U 128 80 171 AB 214 D6
Note — 7-bit printable ASCII range from 32 to 126 decimal. The Custom device menus
represent text values outside that range with a period (.).
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols • Eng 23–5
Eng 23–6 • Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Glossary of Terms
Active Video Lines — All video lines not occurring in the vertical blanking interval. The portion
of the video signal that contains picture information.
Aspect Ratio — The numerical ratio of picture width to height, for example, 4:3 or 16:9.
Auto Transition — An automatic transition in which the manual movement of the fader handle
is simulated electronically. The transition starts when the AUTO TRANS button is pressed and
takes place over a pre-selected time period, measured in frames.
Border — Effects created around the edges of a pattern or on a keyer. If an optional Dual Border
Generator Card is installed, several border, shadow, and outline effects are available on that keyer
as well.
Border Generator — Circuitry that generates various border effects on keys created by the
switcher.
Chroma Key — An effect in which video from one source replaces video of a specific hue in a
second video source. The blue and green hues are most commonly used for chroma keying.
Chrominance — The “depth” or saturation of a color. The three characteristics of a TV color
signal are chrominance, luminance, and hue.
Cut — An instantaneous switch from one video signal to another.
Dissolve — A transition from one video signal to another in which one signal is faded down,
while the other is simultaneously faded up. The term “mix” is often used interchangeably with
“dissolve”.
Downstream Keyer (DSK) — A keyer that places a key “downstream” of the MLE effects
system output. This “top level” effect usually consists of a character generator title.
External Key — A video input (non-primary video) used to produce a key effect. Examples of
external key sources are character generators and cameras.
Fade-to-Black — A controlled change of the on-air picture signal level down to black level.
Field — One half of a complete picture (or frame) interval containing all of the odd, or all of the
even, lines in interlaced scanning. One scan of a TV screen is called a “field”; two fields are
required to make a complete picture (which is a “frame”).
Field Frequency — The rate at which one complete field is scanned, approximately 50 times per
second in 625 video, or 60 times per second in 525 video.
Frame — One complete picture consisting of two fields of interlaced scanning lines.
GPI — An abbreviation for General Purpose Interface, a device which typically allows switcher
automatic transition functions to be controlled remotely.
W
Wait nFields Extra Option ........................... Eng 9-32
Wake Up On Command ............ Eng 11-8, Eng 11-16
Warnings .................................................... Eng 17-11
Status Icons ......................................... Eng 17-12
Web Interface
Account, managing ................................. Eng 6-2
downloading to Frame ........................ Eng 13-15
Frame .................................................. Eng 13-15
storage capacity ....................................... Eng 6-8
system information page ......................... Eng 6-7
upgrading the switcher ............................ Eng 6-3
uploading to Frame ............................. Eng 13-15
Web Issues ..................................................... Eng 4-8
WhiteFlash
Memory Recall Mode, Personality ..... Eng 11-12
Worksheets ................................................... Eng 21-1
Bus Map ................................................ Eng 21-6
Communications ................................. Eng 21-11
Conversion Loop ................................. Eng 21-20
Custom Control ................................... Eng 21-18
Custom Device Protocol ..................... Eng 21-22
GPI I/Os
Aux Panel ..................................... Eng 21-15
Input ............................................. Eng 21-13
Output .......................................... Eng 21-14
Video Input .......................... Eng 21-2, Eng 21-9
X
XFX Extra Effects Card ............................... Eng 2-29
Xpts Extra Option ........................................ Eng 9-29
Z
Z Speed Extra Option ................................... Eng 9-29
Zoom Speed Extra Option ............................ Eng 9-29